<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
	<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Henrik.Moller</id>
	<title>WICE Wiki v2.97 - User contributions [en]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Henrik.Moller"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php/Special:Contributions/Henrik.Moller"/>
	<updated>2026-05-07T17:10:05Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.44.0</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.97&amp;diff=4143</id>
		<title>New features in v2.97</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.97&amp;diff=4143"/>
		<updated>2026-02-18T12:34:50Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Henrik.Moller: /* Create/View mapping on Signal Reader task improvement */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Add all signals and multiple signal sources for signal reader in the assignment editor. ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for WCU hardened mode. ==&lt;br /&gt;
WCU Hardened Mode indicates that a WCU meets the customer-specific requirements in the Module and Configuration settings. When the requirements are fulfilled, the WCU is marked with a system label named “wcu_hardened.”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If Hardened Mode is enabled in the current environment, two buttons are available in both Edit Configuration and Modules. These provide an overview of the required settings and clearly show what is missing for the current WCU to meet the Hardened Mode requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for automatically generating passwords ==&lt;br /&gt;
Admins can now automatically generate a new password for a user directly from the User panel’s Change Password dialog. Learn more [[The Portal Administrator View#The User Tab|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Additional settings for ethernet interfaces on HMX for automotive Ethernet ==&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with version 2.97.0, the Ethernet interface settings on HMX have been extended with two additional fields for automotive Ethernet: &#039;&#039;&#039;Role&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Speed&#039;&#039;&#039;. For automotive Ethernet channels, only the &#039;&#039;&#039;Static&#039;&#039;&#039; addressing mode is supported. Read more about it [[I/O configurations#Role (Automotive only)|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Configurable default time interval for alarms in portal ==&lt;br /&gt;
It is now possible to set a default alarm interval directly in the portal. Users can do this by right-clicking the &#039;&#039;&#039;Active Alarms&#039;&#039;&#039; column in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Vehicles&#039;&#039;&#039; tab or by navigating to the &#039;&#039;&#039;Alarms&#039;&#039;&#039; tab in &#039;&#039;&#039;Administration&#039;&#039;&#039; and clicking the &#039;&#039;&#039;Set Alarm Interval&#039;&#039;&#039; button. Read more [[Alarm#Set Alarm Interval|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Improvements to Creating/View Mapping on Signal Reader Task ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SignalReaderNewView.png|thumb|Signal Reader View Task]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SignalReaderCreateMapping.png|thumb|Signal Reader Create Mapping]]&lt;br /&gt;
The Signal Reader task view has been improved to display the mapped-from and mapped-to names for better clarity. It also shows the mapping type, which can be WCU, WMU, or MRCOM, making it easier to identify which mapping type the CAN/LIN is assigned to. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The process of creating a Signal Reader task has also been enhanced to include additional information. It now indicates whether the CAN is sourced from a mapping type of WCU, WMU, or MRCOM. For a clearer example, refer to the image &#039;Signal Reader Create Mapping&#039;.&amp;quot; To read more about this, [[Mappings|click here]].&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Henrik.Moller</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.97&amp;diff=4142</id>
		<title>New features in v2.97</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.97&amp;diff=4142"/>
		<updated>2026-02-18T12:34:13Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Henrik.Moller: /* Create/View mapping on task improvement */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Add all signals and multiple signal sources for signal reader in the assignment editor. ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for WCU hardened mode. ==&lt;br /&gt;
WCU Hardened Mode indicates that a WCU meets the customer-specific requirements in the Module and Configuration settings. When the requirements are fulfilled, the WCU is marked with a system label named “wcu_hardened.”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If Hardened Mode is enabled in the current environment, two buttons are available in both Edit Configuration and Modules. These provide an overview of the required settings and clearly show what is missing for the current WCU to meet the Hardened Mode requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for automatically generating passwords ==&lt;br /&gt;
Admins can now automatically generate a new password for a user directly from the User panel’s Change Password dialog. Learn more [[The Portal Administrator View#The User Tab|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Additional settings for ethernet interfaces on HMX for automotive Ethernet ==&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with version 2.97.0, the Ethernet interface settings on HMX have been extended with two additional fields for automotive Ethernet: &#039;&#039;&#039;Role&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Speed&#039;&#039;&#039;. For automotive Ethernet channels, only the &#039;&#039;&#039;Static&#039;&#039;&#039; addressing mode is supported. Read more about it [[I/O configurations#Role (Automotive only)|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Configurable default time interval for alarms in portal ==&lt;br /&gt;
It is now possible to set a default alarm interval directly in the portal. Users can do this by right-clicking the &#039;&#039;&#039;Active Alarms&#039;&#039;&#039; column in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Vehicles&#039;&#039;&#039; tab or by navigating to the &#039;&#039;&#039;Alarms&#039;&#039;&#039; tab in &#039;&#039;&#039;Administration&#039;&#039;&#039; and clicking the &#039;&#039;&#039;Set Alarm Interval&#039;&#039;&#039; button. Read more [[Alarm#Set Alarm Interval|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Create/View mapping on Signal Reader task improvement ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SignalReaderNewView.png|thumb|Signal Reader View Task]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SignalReaderCreateMapping.png|thumb|Signal Reader Create Mapping]]&lt;br /&gt;
The Signal Reader task view has been improved to display the mapped-from and mapped-to names for better clarity. It also shows the mapping type, which can be WCU, WMU, or MRCOM, making it easier to identify which mapping type the CAN/LIN is assigned to. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The process of creating a Signal Reader task has also been enhanced to include additional information. It now indicates whether the CAN is sourced from a mapping type of WCU, WMU, or MRCOM. For a clearer example, refer to the image &#039;Signal Reader Create Mapping&#039;.&amp;quot; To read more about this, [[Mappings|click here]].&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Henrik.Moller</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=Mappings&amp;diff=4141</id>
		<title>Mappings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=Mappings&amp;diff=4141"/>
		<updated>2026-02-18T12:33:13Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Henrik.Moller: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=== Overview ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SignalReaderMapping.png|thumb|679x679px]]&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;Mappings for this task&#039;&#039; window is used to configure the connections between logical communication channels (from a signal reader assignment) and the physical buses used in the system. It displays both CAN and LIN channels and allows you to assign them to specific physical buses (WCU/WMU or VCF).&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Left Side – Logical Channels ===&lt;br /&gt;
On the &#039;&#039;&#039;left side&#039;&#039;&#039; of each group, you can see the logical configuration:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Channel:&#039;&#039;&#039; The CAN or LIN bus identifier (e.g., CAN1, LIN1).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Speed:&#039;&#039;&#039; The communication speed of the bus (e.g., 500 kbit/s for CAN, 9600 bit/s for LIN).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Name:&#039;&#039;&#039; The assigned name of the channel.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;#Signals:&#039;&#039;&#039; Number of signals currently mapped to that bus.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;WCU:&#039;&#039;&#039; The drop-down menu where you assign the physical bus.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This area represents the buses defined in the signal reader assignment. These are the &#039;&#039;logical&#039;&#039; buses that need to be linked to &#039;&#039;physical&#039;&#039; buses.&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Right Side – Physical Bus Selection ===&lt;br /&gt;
On the &#039;&#039;&#039;right side&#039;&#039;&#039;, under the &#039;&#039;&#039;WCU&#039;&#039;&#039; column, you select the &#039;&#039;&#039;physical bus&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The physical bus can belong to a &#039;&#039;&#039;WCU, WMU&#039;&#039;&#039; or a &#039;&#039;&#039;VCF&#039;&#039;&#039; channel.&lt;br /&gt;
* Selecting the correct WCU ensures that signals are properly routed to the physical communication hardware.&lt;br /&gt;
* The syntax for a physical bus is:   &#039;&#039;&#039;BUSIO:Speed:Name&#039;&#039;&#039;   (for example: CAN1:500:CAN1).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Automatic Mapping ===&lt;br /&gt;
The system performs &#039;&#039;&#039;auto-mapping&#039;&#039;&#039; automatically when the window is opened or refreshed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Auto-mapping works as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Name Matching:&#039;&#039;&#039; The tool first tries to match logical and physical buses based on their names.&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Bus Number Matching:&#039;&#039;&#039; If names don’t match, it attempts to match based on bus numbers.&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Speed Requirement:&#039;&#039;&#039; The mapping only succeeds if the &#039;&#039;&#039;bus speeds&#039;&#039;&#039; are identical.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a match cannot be made, or if an error occurs, a &#039;&#039;&#039;red triangle&#039;&#039;&#039;  appears next to the affected bus.&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Error and Warning Indicators ===&lt;br /&gt;
A &#039;&#039;&#039;red triangle&#039;&#039;&#039; will appear in the following cases:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The &#039;&#039;&#039;bus speed&#039;&#039;&#039; does not match between logical and physical buses.&lt;br /&gt;
* The selected &#039;&#039;&#039;physical bus&#039;&#039;&#039; has already been assigned elsewhere. Each physical bus can &#039;&#039;&#039;only be used once&#039;&#039;&#039; in the mapping.&lt;br /&gt;
A yellow triangle will appear in the following cases:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* No physical bus is selected&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Grouping Option ===&lt;br /&gt;
In the &#039;&#039;&#039;top-right corner&#039;&#039;&#039;, there is an option to choose whether &#039;&#039;&#039;WCUs should be grouped&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When grouping is enabled, the system will automatically match WCUs that have:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The same number of channels,&lt;br /&gt;
* The same I/O numbering, and&lt;br /&gt;
* The same communication speed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When groups are created, an &#039;&#039;&#039;eye icon&#039;&#039;&#039; 👁️ and a &#039;&#039;&#039;number&#039;&#039;&#039; appear next to the group name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Clicking the &#039;&#039;&#039;eye icon&#039;&#039;&#039; or the &#039;&#039;&#039;number&#039;&#039;&#039; displays a list of all WCUs included in that group.&lt;br /&gt;
* The number indicates how many WCUs are currently part of the group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This grouping feature helps simplify configuration when working with multiple identical WCUs.&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Buttons ===&lt;br /&gt;
At the bottom of the window:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save:&#039;&#039;&#039; Confirms and saves all mappings.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Restore:&#039;&#039;&#039; Resets everything to the &#039;&#039;auto-mapped&#039;&#039; state.   (Auto-mapping is always performed first when the window opens.)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Close:&#039;&#039;&#039; Exits the window without saving changes.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Henrik.Moller</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=File:SignalReaderMapping.png&amp;diff=4140</id>
		<title>File:SignalReaderMapping.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=File:SignalReaderMapping.png&amp;diff=4140"/>
		<updated>2026-02-18T12:33:07Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Henrik.Moller: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;SignalReaderMapping&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Henrik.Moller</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.97&amp;diff=4138</id>
		<title>New features in v2.97</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.97&amp;diff=4138"/>
		<updated>2026-02-18T12:27:17Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Henrik.Moller: /* Create/View mapping on task improvement */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Add all signals and multiple signal sources for signal reader in the assignment editor. ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for WCU hardened mode. ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for automatically generating passwords ==&lt;br /&gt;
Admins can now automatically generate a new password for a user directly from the User panel’s Change Password dialog. Learn more [[The Portal Administrator View#The User Tab|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Additional settings for ethernet interfaces on HMX for automotive Ethernet ==&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with version 2.97.0, the Ethernet interface settings on HMX have been extended with two additional fields for automotive Ethernet: &#039;&#039;&#039;Role&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Speed&#039;&#039;&#039;. For automotive Ethernet channels, only the &#039;&#039;&#039;Static&#039;&#039;&#039; addressing mode is supported. Read more about it [[I/O configurations#Role (Automotive only)|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Configurable default time interval for alarms in portal ==&lt;br /&gt;
It is now possible to set a default alarm interval directly in the portal. Users can do this by right-clicking the &#039;&#039;&#039;Active Alarms&#039;&#039;&#039; column in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Vehicles&#039;&#039;&#039; tab or by navigating to the &#039;&#039;&#039;Alarms&#039;&#039;&#039; tab in &#039;&#039;&#039;Administration&#039;&#039;&#039; and clicking the &#039;&#039;&#039;Set Alarm Interval&#039;&#039;&#039; button. Read more [[Alarm#Set Alarm Interval|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Create/View mapping on task improvement ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SignalReaderNewView.png|thumb|Signal Reader View Task]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SignalReaderCreateMapping.png|thumb|Signal Reader Create Mapping]]&lt;br /&gt;
The Signal Reader task view has been improved to display the mapped-from and mapped-to names for better clarity. It also shows the mapping type, which can be WCU, WMU, or MRCOM, making it easier to identify which mapping type the CAN/LIN is assigned to. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The process of creating a Signal Reader task has also been enhanced to include additional information. It now indicates whether the CAN is sourced from a mapping type of WCU, WMU, or MRCOM. For a clearer example, refer to the image &#039;Signal Reader Create Mapping&#039;.&amp;quot; To read more about this, [[Mappings|click here]].&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Henrik.Moller</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.97&amp;diff=4137</id>
		<title>New features in v2.97</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.97&amp;diff=4137"/>
		<updated>2026-02-18T12:26:55Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Henrik.Moller: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Add all signals and multiple signal sources for signal reader in the assignment editor. ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for WCU hardened mode. ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for automatically generating passwords ==&lt;br /&gt;
Admins can now automatically generate a new password for a user directly from the User panel’s Change Password dialog. Learn more [[The Portal Administrator View#The User Tab|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Additional settings for ethernet interfaces on HMX for automotive Ethernet ==&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with version 2.97.0, the Ethernet interface settings on HMX have been extended with two additional fields for automotive Ethernet: &#039;&#039;&#039;Role&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Speed&#039;&#039;&#039;. For automotive Ethernet channels, only the &#039;&#039;&#039;Static&#039;&#039;&#039; addressing mode is supported. Read more about it [[I/O configurations#Role (Automotive only)|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Configurable default time interval for alarms in portal ==&lt;br /&gt;
It is now possible to set a default alarm interval directly in the portal. Users can do this by right-clicking the &#039;&#039;&#039;Active Alarms&#039;&#039;&#039; column in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Vehicles&#039;&#039;&#039; tab or by navigating to the &#039;&#039;&#039;Alarms&#039;&#039;&#039; tab in &#039;&#039;&#039;Administration&#039;&#039;&#039; and clicking the &#039;&#039;&#039;Set Alarm Interval&#039;&#039;&#039; button. Read more [[Alarm#Set Alarm Interval|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Create/View mapping on task improvement ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SignalReaderNewView.png|thumb|Signal Reader View Task]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SignalReaderCreateMapping.png|thumb|Signal Reader Create Mapping]]&lt;br /&gt;
The Signal Reader task view has been improved to display the mapped-from and mapped-to names for better clarity. It also shows the mapping type, which can be WCU, WMU, or MRCOM, making it easier to identify which mapping type the CAN/LIN is assigned to. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The process of creating a Signal Reader task has been enhanced to include additional information. It now indicates whether the CAN is sourced from a mapping type of WCU, WMU, or MRCOM. For a clearer example, refer to the image &#039;Signal Reader Create Mapping&#039;.&amp;quot; To read more about this, [[Mappings|click here]].&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Henrik.Moller</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=File:SignalReaderCreateMapping.png&amp;diff=4136</id>
		<title>File:SignalReaderCreateMapping.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=File:SignalReaderCreateMapping.png&amp;diff=4136"/>
		<updated>2026-02-18T12:20:35Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Henrik.Moller: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;SignalReaderCreateMapping&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Henrik.Moller</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.97&amp;diff=4135</id>
		<title>New features in v2.97</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.97&amp;diff=4135"/>
		<updated>2026-02-18T12:16:24Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Henrik.Moller: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Add all signals and multiple signal sources for signal reader in the assignment editor. ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for WCU hardened mode. ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for automatically generating passwords ==&lt;br /&gt;
Admins can now automatically generate a new password for a user directly from the User panel’s Change Password dialog. Learn more [[The Portal Administrator View#The User Tab|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Additional settings for ethernet interfaces on HMX for automotive Ethernet ==&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with version 2.97.0, the Ethernet interface settings on HMX have been extended with two additional fields for automotive Ethernet: &#039;&#039;&#039;Role&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Speed&#039;&#039;&#039;. For automotive Ethernet channels, only the &#039;&#039;&#039;Static&#039;&#039;&#039; addressing mode is supported. Read more about it [[I/O configurations#Role (Automotive only)|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Configurable default time interval for alarms in portal ==&lt;br /&gt;
It is now possible to set a default alarm interval directly in the portal. Users can do this by right-clicking the &#039;&#039;&#039;Active Alarms&#039;&#039;&#039; column in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Vehicles&#039;&#039;&#039; tab or by navigating to the &#039;&#039;&#039;Alarms&#039;&#039;&#039; tab in &#039;&#039;&#039;Administration&#039;&#039;&#039; and clicking the &#039;&#039;&#039;Set Alarm Interval&#039;&#039;&#039; button. Read more [[Alarm#Set Alarm Interval|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Create/View mapping on task improvement ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SignalReaderNewView.png|thumb|Signal Reader View Task]]&lt;br /&gt;
The Signal Reader task view has been improved to display the mapped-from and mapped-to names for better clarity. It also shows the mapping type, which can be WCU, WMU, or MRCOM, making it easier to identify which mapping type the CAN/LIN is assigned to. Read more about it [[Mappings|here]].&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Henrik.Moller</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.97&amp;diff=4134</id>
		<title>New features in v2.97</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.97&amp;diff=4134"/>
		<updated>2026-02-18T12:15:42Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Henrik.Moller: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Add all signals and multiple signal sources for signal reader in the assignment editor. ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for WCU hardened mode. ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for automatically generating passwords ==&lt;br /&gt;
Admins can now automatically generate a new password for a user directly from the User panel’s Change Password dialog. Learn more [[The Portal Administrator View#The User Tab|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Additional settings for ethernet interfaces on HMX for automotive Ethernet ==&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with version 2.97.0, the Ethernet interface settings on HMX have been extended with two additional fields for automotive Ethernet: &#039;&#039;&#039;Role&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Speed&#039;&#039;&#039;. For automotive Ethernet channels, only the &#039;&#039;&#039;Static&#039;&#039;&#039; addressing mode is supported. Read more about it [[I/O configurations#Role (Automotive only)|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Configurable default time interval for alarms in portal ==&lt;br /&gt;
It is now possible to set a default alarm interval directly in the portal. Users can do this by right-clicking the &#039;&#039;&#039;Active Alarms&#039;&#039;&#039; column in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Vehicles&#039;&#039;&#039; tab or by navigating to the &#039;&#039;&#039;Alarms&#039;&#039;&#039; tab in &#039;&#039;&#039;Administration&#039;&#039;&#039; and clicking the &#039;&#039;&#039;Set Alarm Interval&#039;&#039;&#039; button. Read more [[Alarm#Set Alarm Interval|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Create/View mapping on task improvement ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SignalReaderNewView.png|thumb|Signal Reader View Task]]&lt;br /&gt;
The Signal Reader task view has been improved to display the mapped-from and mapped-to names for better clarity. It also shows the mapping type, which can be WCU, WMU, or MRCOM, making it easier to identify which mapping type the CAN/LIN is assigned to.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Henrik.Moller</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=File:SignalReaderNewView.png&amp;diff=4133</id>
		<title>File:SignalReaderNewView.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=File:SignalReaderNewView.png&amp;diff=4133"/>
		<updated>2026-02-18T12:15:33Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Henrik.Moller: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;SignalReaderNewView&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Henrik.Moller</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.97&amp;diff=4131</id>
		<title>New features in v2.97</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.97&amp;diff=4131"/>
		<updated>2026-02-11T08:51:42Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Henrik.Moller: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Support for automatically generating passwords ==&lt;br /&gt;
Admins can now automatically generate a new password for a user directly from the User panel’s Change Password dialog. Learn more [[The Portal Administrator View#The User Tab|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Additional settings for ethernet interfaces on HMX for automotive Ethernet ==&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with version 2.97.0, the Ethernet interface settings on HMX have been extended with two additional fields for automotive Ethernet: &#039;&#039;&#039;Role&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Speed&#039;&#039;&#039;. For automotive Ethernet channels, only the &#039;&#039;&#039;Static&#039;&#039;&#039; addressing mode is supported. Read more about it [[I/O configurations#Role (Automotive only)|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Configurable default time interval for alarms in portal ==&lt;br /&gt;
It is now possible to set a default alarm interval directly in the portal. Users can do this by right-clicking the &#039;&#039;&#039;Active Alarms&#039;&#039;&#039; column in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Vehicles&#039;&#039;&#039; tab or by navigating to the &#039;&#039;&#039;Alarms&#039;&#039;&#039; tab in &#039;&#039;&#039;Administration&#039;&#039;&#039; and clicking the &#039;&#039;&#039;Set Alarm Interval&#039;&#039;&#039; button. Read more [[Alarm#Set Alarm Interval|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== View mapping on task improvement ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SignalReaderView.png|thumb|Signal Reader View Task]]&lt;br /&gt;
The signal reader task view has been enhanced to show the mapped-from and mapped-to names for improved readability.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Henrik.Moller</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.97&amp;diff=4130</id>
		<title>New features in v2.97</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.97&amp;diff=4130"/>
		<updated>2026-02-11T08:51:14Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Henrik.Moller: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Support for automatically generating passwords ==&lt;br /&gt;
Admins can now automatically generate a new password for a user directly from the User panel’s Change Password dialog. Learn more [[The Portal Administrator View#The User Tab|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Additional settings for ethernet interfaces on HMX for automotive Ethernet ==&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with version 2.97.0, the Ethernet interface settings on HMX have been extended with two additional fields for automotive Ethernet: &#039;&#039;&#039;Role&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Speed&#039;&#039;&#039;. For automotive Ethernet channels, only the &#039;&#039;&#039;Static&#039;&#039;&#039; addressing mode is supported. Read more about it [[I/O configurations|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Configurable default time interval for alarms in portal ==&lt;br /&gt;
It is now possible to set a default alarm interval directly in the portal. Users can do this by right-clicking the &#039;&#039;&#039;Active Alarms&#039;&#039;&#039; column in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Vehicles&#039;&#039;&#039; tab or by navigating to the &#039;&#039;&#039;Alarms&#039;&#039;&#039; tab in &#039;&#039;&#039;Administration&#039;&#039;&#039; and clicking the &#039;&#039;&#039;Set Alarm Interval&#039;&#039;&#039; button. Read more [[Alarm#Set Alarm Interval|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== View mapping on task improvement ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SignalReaderView.png|thumb|Signal Reader View Task]]&lt;br /&gt;
The signal reader task view has been enhanced to show the mapped-from and mapped-to names for improved readability.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Henrik.Moller</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.97&amp;diff=4129</id>
		<title>New features in v2.97</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.97&amp;diff=4129"/>
		<updated>2026-02-11T08:48:55Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Henrik.Moller: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Support for automatically generating passwords ==&lt;br /&gt;
Admins can now automatically generate a new password for a user directly from the User panel’s Change Password dialog. Learn more [[The Portal Administrator View#The User Tab|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Additional settings for ethernet interfaces on HMX for automotive Ethernet ==&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with version 2.97.0, the Ethernet interface settings on HMX have been extended with two additional fields for automotive Ethernet: &#039;&#039;&#039;Role&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Speed&#039;&#039;&#039;. For automotive Ethernet channels, only the &#039;&#039;&#039;Static&#039;&#039;&#039; addressing mode is supported. Read more about it [[I/O configurations|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Configurable default time interval for alarms in portal ==&lt;br /&gt;
It is now possible to set a default alarm interval directly in the portal. Users can do this by right-clicking the &#039;&#039;&#039;Active Alarms&#039;&#039;&#039; column in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Vehicles&#039;&#039;&#039; tab or by navigating to the &#039;&#039;&#039;Alarms&#039;&#039;&#039; tab in &#039;&#039;&#039;Administration&#039;&#039;&#039; and clicking the &#039;&#039;&#039;Set Alarm Interval&#039;&#039;&#039; button. Read more [[Alarm|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== View mapping on task improvement ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SignalReaderView.png|thumb|Signal Reader View Task]]&lt;br /&gt;
The signal reader task view has been enhanced to show the mapped-from and mapped-to names for improved readability.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Henrik.Moller</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.97&amp;diff=4128</id>
		<title>New features in v2.97</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.97&amp;diff=4128"/>
		<updated>2026-02-11T08:48:22Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Henrik.Moller: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Support for automatically generating passwords ==&lt;br /&gt;
Admins can now automatically generate a new password for a user directly from the User panel’s Change Password dialog. Learn more [[The Portal Administrator View#The User Tab|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Additional settings for ethernet interfaces on HMX for automotive Ethernet ==&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with version 2.97.0, the Ethernet interface settings on HMX have been extended with two additional fields for automotive Ethernet: &#039;&#039;&#039;Role&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Speed&#039;&#039;&#039;. For automotive Ethernet channels, only the &#039;&#039;&#039;Static&#039;&#039;&#039; addressing mode is supported. read more about it [[I/O configurations|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Configurable default time interval for alarms in portal ==&lt;br /&gt;
It is now possible to set a default alarm interval directly in the portal. Users can do this by right-clicking the &#039;&#039;&#039;Active Alarms&#039;&#039;&#039; column in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Vehicles&#039;&#039;&#039; tab or by navigating to the &#039;&#039;&#039;Alarms&#039;&#039;&#039; tab in &#039;&#039;&#039;Administration&#039;&#039;&#039; and clicking the &#039;&#039;&#039;Set Alarm Interval&#039;&#039;&#039; button. Read more [[Alarm|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== View mapping on task improvement ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SignalReaderView.png|thumb|Signal Reader View Task]]&lt;br /&gt;
The signal reader task view has been enhanced to show the mapped-from and mapped-to names for improved readability.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Henrik.Moller</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=I/O_configurations&amp;diff=4127</id>
		<title>I/O configurations</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=I/O_configurations&amp;diff=4127"/>
		<updated>2026-02-11T08:46:38Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Henrik.Moller: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;keywords&amp;quot;&amp;gt; io, io configurations, io config, io configs &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;includeonly&amp;gt;= I/O configurations =&amp;lt;/includeonly&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;The following applies to version &amp;gt;= 2.41 of the portal:&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;For WCUs with software version &amp;gt;= 2.41 the &amp;quot;Edit Configuration&amp;quot; window has a new tab named &amp;quot;IO&amp;quot;. In this tab, it is possible to edit the settings of the CAN and Ethernet channels of a WCU. It is also possible to apply a pre defined template which is created and managed by an admin. The &amp;quot;Edit Configuration&amp;quot; window is reached by going to the Vehicles tab, select a WCU and press the button &amp;quot;Edit Configuration&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Edit configuration IO.png|thumb|Edit Configuration: IO.]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Edit CAN channels==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:WCU conf io can channels.png|thumb|Edit CAN Channels]]&lt;br /&gt;
The number of available CAN channels depends on the platform type of the WCU which is configured. The group of CAN channels consists of four columns named Channel, Speed, Name and Comment. Each column is described separately below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Channel===&lt;br /&gt;
This column is a checkbox and if you enable CAN X, this means that X is available for mappings when creating a new task and uploading this task to his WCU. Read more about [[Mappings]]. In the same way, disabling CAN X means that X is not available for mappings. If a CAN channel for some reason is not connected to the WCU, then it could be good choice to disabling it here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Speed (kB)===&lt;br /&gt;
The speed column shows the baud rate of each CAN channel. This value was previously added to the WCU configuration when the WCU was connected to a CAR but from now it has to be set manually in this tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== FD Speed (kB) ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wcu-configuration-can-fd.png|alt=CAN FD setting for the HMX platform|thumb|CAN FD setting for the HMX platform]]&lt;br /&gt;
If the platform is HMX and the WCU version is 2.91.0 or later, a column will appear for the CAN channel. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Name===&lt;br /&gt;
In this column it is possible to set a nickname for the channel. This name is used when a Signalreader task or assignment is automapped (see [[Mappings]]) so choose your names carefully. The default value is CAN 1,2..6.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Comment===&lt;br /&gt;
The last column is used to add some comments to each channel. This is typically some describing text, e.g. the reason why a channel is disabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Add WMU(s)===&lt;br /&gt;
If your Portal has [[WMU | WMU&#039;s]] enabled the &amp;quot;Add WMU&amp;quot; button will show in the CAN section. You can then add/remove WMU&#039;s and configure their CAN channels in the same way as the WCU&#039;s CAN channels are configured. For each WMU that is added, a corresponding tab is added under the [[The_Portal_Administrator_View#WMU&#039;s_Power_Management | Power Management tab]] for configuring the WMU&#039;s power behaviour.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Add CAN channels ===&lt;br /&gt;
If your Portal has Vehicle Communication Forwarder enabled, the &amp;quot;Add CAN channels&amp;quot; button will show in the CAN section. If both WMUs and Vehicle Communication Forwarder are enabled in your Portal, only &amp;quot;Add CAN channels&amp;quot; will show up. After having added a Vehicle Communication Forwarder with at least one CAN channel, pressing the button again will add more CAN channels to the Vehicle Communication Forwarder. When removing CAN channels, it is possible to either remove the entire Vehicle Communication Forwarder, or individual CAN channels from it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Edit Ethernet Channels==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:NewEthernetChannel.png|thumb|Edit Ethernet Channels]]&lt;br /&gt;
Like for CAN channels, the number of available Ethernet channels depends on the platform type of the WCU which is configured. The group of Ethernet channels contains eight columns and the individual meaning is as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Channel===&lt;br /&gt;
This column indicates which interface or interfaces that exists.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Addressing mode===&lt;br /&gt;
In this column the Addressing mode is configured. The choices are &amp;quot;DHCP client&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;AutoIP&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Static&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===IP address===&lt;br /&gt;
Here you set the static IP address if you have selected &amp;quot;Static&amp;quot; as the Addressing mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Netmask===&lt;br /&gt;
Here you set the netmask if you have selected &amp;quot;Static&amp;quot; as the Addressing mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Default route===&lt;br /&gt;
Here you set the default route if you have selected &amp;quot;Static&amp;quot; as the Addressing mode. This field only shows if the WCU software version is 2.85.0 or later. The default route is the route that takes effect when no other route is available for an IP destination address.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Name Server (DNS)===&lt;br /&gt;
Here you set the Name Server if you have selected &amp;quot;Static&amp;quot; as the Addressing mode. This field only shows if the WCU software version is 2.85.0 or later. Here you set the name of the DNS protocol.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Name===&lt;br /&gt;
In this column you can set a nickname for this channel. This setting has no effect on the WCU side.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Comment===&lt;br /&gt;
In this column you can set a comment for this channel. Like for the name, this setting has no effect on the WCU side.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Role (Automotive only) ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EthernetChannelWithAutomotive.png|thumb|Ethernet Channel With Automotive]]&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can select a role between Master and Slave. this is only available from version 2.97.0 and later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Speed (Automotive only) ===&lt;br /&gt;
In this field, the user can select the speed (in Mbps) for the Ethernet channel. The available options are 100 Mbps and 1000 Mbps. This feature is available starting from version 2.97.0.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==The Miscellaneous Section==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot from 2024-09-16 09-49-47.png|thumb|Miscellaneous]]&lt;br /&gt;
This section is available for WCUs with version 2.49 or later.&lt;br /&gt;
===Set digital out 3 on boot=== &lt;br /&gt;
Digital out 3 is one of the output pins in the dsub contact on WCUs of model MX4. This setting activates that pin on start-up of the WCU. The purpose of this is to trigger an external measurement equipment (e.g. [[Creating_a_Task#M-Log|M-Log]] or [[Creating_a_Task#Arcos|Arcos]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Diagnostic tester priority===&lt;br /&gt;
For WCUs of version later than or equal to 2.60 it is possible to choose to configure the diagnostic tester priority. If enabled, a value between 1-12 can be selected. The described options are depicted in Figure &amp;quot;Miscellaneous&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Allow ethernet activation on WCU ===&lt;br /&gt;
For WCUs of version 2.90.4 or later it is possible to choose whether or not to allow the WCU to use ethernet activation. Not allowing this might disturb some of the WCUs features.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Set 5V out on boot===&lt;br /&gt;
Option to set one of the output pins on the WCU to supply electricity at 5V to external equipment when the WCU is starting up. The option is visible for WCUs of model MX4 (except submodel V61) and with version 2.76.0 or later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Activate buzzer on detected digital input change===&lt;br /&gt;
Option to enable that the WCU makes a buzzing sound when a trigger-button (or other digital input) is activated on the WCU. It is possible on all MX4 models. The option is visible for WCUs with version 2.76.0 or later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Diagnostic firewall disable and PIN ===&lt;br /&gt;
Option to disable diagnostic firewall. Requires PIN. Visible for WCUs with version 2.89.0 or later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Diagnostic tester detection ===&lt;br /&gt;
Option to detect any diagnostic testers that they may not be interrupted, typically during OTA. Available for WCUs with version 2.96.0 or later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Manage templates==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Io config2.png|thumb|frame|Selecting Template]]&lt;br /&gt;
Admins can save configs as templates (see [[#Manage templates (for admins) | Manage templates (for admins)]]) and normal users can use these templates to fill all columns with the data stored in the template.&lt;br /&gt;
Clicking &amp;quot;Apply&amp;quot; will apply the selected template. You can always change settings or add more info, the template could be anything you need or just act as a starting point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If WMUs are enabled in the portal, a template will save the CANs from each WMU and when a template is selected the WMU CANs are applied 1:1 to each existing WMU in the configuration. &lt;br /&gt;
If there are no WMUs in the configuration the template&#039;s WMU CANs will not be applied, only the WCU&#039;s CANs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Manage templates (for admins)==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Io config3.png|thumb|frame|Manage Templates (admin view)]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Io config4.png|thumb|frame|Manage Templates (with WMUs enabled)]]&lt;br /&gt;
If you are an admin you have an extra button &amp;quot;Save current config as template&amp;quot; in the Manage configuration templates window. Clicking it to save the current configuration as a template will prompt you for a name. If the name already exists (case insensitive) a confirmation dialog will popup before overwriting.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, as admin you will be able to remove existing templates, which is done by clicking the red &amp;quot;Remove record&amp;quot; icon to the right of the template name. A confirmation dialog will popup to prevent deletion by mistake.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Show Vehicle Profile==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:WCU conf io car interf.png|thumb|Vehicle Profile]]&lt;br /&gt;
The button &amp;quot;Show vehicle profile&amp;quot; can be used to show, and hide, a panel showing the CAN and ethernet information for the connected car, see Figure &amp;quot;Vehicle Profile&amp;quot;. This option is disabled if no car is connected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Check PINs ==&lt;br /&gt;
Requires version 2.89.0 or later. Pressing &#039;&#039;&#039;Check PINs&#039;&#039;&#039; for a WCU will lookup existing PINs for HIA, HIB, and Diagnostic firewall disable. If available the PINs will be applied to their corresponding fields. If not all PINs are available there will be a pop-up specifying which PINs are unavailable and for which reason: either missing entirely or there exists a PIN for the ECU but for the wrong service area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For resource groups &#039;&#039;&#039;Check PINs&#039;&#039;&#039; will not apply any found PINs, instead if there are any resources with missing PINs it will specify, like for individual WCUs, which PINs are missing and for which WCUs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To apply PINs for resource groups see [[I/O configurations#Apply uploaded PINs|apply uploaded PINs]] below.&lt;br /&gt;
== Apply uploaded PINs ==&lt;br /&gt;
Option for resource groups to apply uploaded PINs for HIA, HIB, and Diagnostic firewall disable. Resets back to unchecked after saving the configuration. Visible for WCUs with version 2.89.0 or later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PINs must first have been be uploaded via either the &#039;&#039;&#039;Upload Vehicle PINs&#039;&#039;&#039; button in the vehicles tab (for multiple vehicles), or by right-clicking a WCU and selecting &#039;&#039;&#039;Upload Vehicle PINs&#039;&#039;&#039; (for a single vehicle). As of 2.94.0 the PINs may also be fetched from PIE via &#039;&#039;Administration&#039;&#039;-&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Resource group&#039;&#039;s&#039;&#039;,&#039;&#039; read more about fetching PINs from PIE [[The Portal Administrator View#The Resource Groups Tab|here]].&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Henrik.Moller</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=File:EthernetChannelWithAutomotive.png&amp;diff=4126</id>
		<title>File:EthernetChannelWithAutomotive.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=File:EthernetChannelWithAutomotive.png&amp;diff=4126"/>
		<updated>2026-02-11T08:46:11Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Henrik.Moller: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;EthernetChannelWithAutomotive&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Henrik.Moller</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=I/O_configurations&amp;diff=4125</id>
		<title>I/O configurations</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=I/O_configurations&amp;diff=4125"/>
		<updated>2026-02-11T08:44:47Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Henrik.Moller: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;keywords&amp;quot;&amp;gt; io, io configurations, io config, io configs &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;includeonly&amp;gt;= I/O configurations =&amp;lt;/includeonly&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;The following applies to version &amp;gt;= 2.41 of the portal:&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;For WCUs with software version &amp;gt;= 2.41 the &amp;quot;Edit Configuration&amp;quot; window has a new tab named &amp;quot;IO&amp;quot;. In this tab, it is possible to edit the settings of the CAN and Ethernet channels of a WCU. It is also possible to apply a pre defined template which is created and managed by an admin. The &amp;quot;Edit Configuration&amp;quot; window is reached by going to the Vehicles tab, select a WCU and press the button &amp;quot;Edit Configuration&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Edit configuration IO.png|thumb|Edit Configuration: IO.]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Edit CAN channels==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:WCU conf io can channels.png|thumb|Edit CAN Channels]]&lt;br /&gt;
The number of available CAN channels depends on the platform type of the WCU which is configured. The group of CAN channels consists of four columns named Channel, Speed, Name and Comment. Each column is described separately below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Channel===&lt;br /&gt;
This column is a checkbox and if you enable CAN X, this means that X is available for mappings when creating a new task and uploading this task to his WCU. Read more about [[Mappings]]. In the same way, disabling CAN X means that X is not available for mappings. If a CAN channel for some reason is not connected to the WCU, then it could be good choice to disabling it here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Speed (kB)===&lt;br /&gt;
The speed column shows the baud rate of each CAN channel. This value was previously added to the WCU configuration when the WCU was connected to a CAR but from now it has to be set manually in this tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== FD Speed (kB) ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wcu-configuration-can-fd.png|alt=CAN FD setting for the HMX platform|thumb|CAN FD setting for the HMX platform]]&lt;br /&gt;
If the platform is HMX and the WCU version is 2.91.0 or later, a column will appear for the CAN channel. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Name===&lt;br /&gt;
In this column it is possible to set a nickname for the channel. This name is used when a Signalreader task or assignment is automapped (see [[Mappings]]) so choose your names carefully. The default value is CAN 1,2..6.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Comment===&lt;br /&gt;
The last column is used to add some comments to each channel. This is typically some describing text, e.g. the reason why a channel is disabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Add WMU(s)===&lt;br /&gt;
If your Portal has [[WMU | WMU&#039;s]] enabled the &amp;quot;Add WMU&amp;quot; button will show in the CAN section. You can then add/remove WMU&#039;s and configure their CAN channels in the same way as the WCU&#039;s CAN channels are configured. For each WMU that is added, a corresponding tab is added under the [[The_Portal_Administrator_View#WMU&#039;s_Power_Management | Power Management tab]] for configuring the WMU&#039;s power behaviour.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Add CAN channels ===&lt;br /&gt;
If your Portal has Vehicle Communication Forwarder enabled, the &amp;quot;Add CAN channels&amp;quot; button will show in the CAN section. If both WMUs and Vehicle Communication Forwarder are enabled in your Portal, only &amp;quot;Add CAN channels&amp;quot; will show up. After having added a Vehicle Communication Forwarder with at least one CAN channel, pressing the button again will add more CAN channels to the Vehicle Communication Forwarder. When removing CAN channels, it is possible to either remove the entire Vehicle Communication Forwarder, or individual CAN channels from it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Edit Ethernet Channels==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:NewEthernetChannel.png|thumb|Edit Ethernet Channels]]&lt;br /&gt;
Like for CAN channels, the number of available Ethernet channels depends on the platform type of the WCU which is configured. The group of Ethernet channels contains eight columns and the individual meaning is as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Channel===&lt;br /&gt;
This column indicates which interface or interfaces that exists.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Addressing mode===&lt;br /&gt;
In this column the Addressing mode is configured. The choices are &amp;quot;DHCP client&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;AutoIP&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Static&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===IP address===&lt;br /&gt;
Here you set the static IP address if you have selected &amp;quot;Static&amp;quot; as the Addressing mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Netmask===&lt;br /&gt;
Here you set the netmask if you have selected &amp;quot;Static&amp;quot; as the Addressing mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Default route===&lt;br /&gt;
Here you set the default route if you have selected &amp;quot;Static&amp;quot; as the Addressing mode. This field only shows if the WCU software version is 2.85.0 or later. The default route is the route that takes effect when no other route is available for an IP destination address.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Name Server (DNS)===&lt;br /&gt;
Here you set the Name Server if you have selected &amp;quot;Static&amp;quot; as the Addressing mode. This field only shows if the WCU software version is 2.85.0 or later. Here you set the name of the DNS protocol.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Name===&lt;br /&gt;
In this column you can set a nickname for this channel. This setting has no effect on the WCU side.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Comment===&lt;br /&gt;
In this column you can set a comment for this channel. Like for the name, this setting has no effect on the WCU side.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Role (Automotive only) ===&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can select a role between Master and Slave. this is only available from version 2.97.0 and later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Speed (Automotive only) ===&lt;br /&gt;
In this field, the user can select the speed (in Mbps) for the Ethernet channel. The available options are 100 Mbps and 1000 Mbps. This feature is available starting from version 2.97.0.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==The Miscellaneous Section==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot from 2024-09-16 09-49-47.png|thumb|Miscellaneous]]&lt;br /&gt;
This section is available for WCUs with version 2.49 or later.&lt;br /&gt;
===Set digital out 3 on boot=== &lt;br /&gt;
Digital out 3 is one of the output pins in the dsub contact on WCUs of model MX4. This setting activates that pin on start-up of the WCU. The purpose of this is to trigger an external measurement equipment (e.g. [[Creating_a_Task#M-Log|M-Log]] or [[Creating_a_Task#Arcos|Arcos]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Diagnostic tester priority===&lt;br /&gt;
For WCUs of version later than or equal to 2.60 it is possible to choose to configure the diagnostic tester priority. If enabled, a value between 1-12 can be selected. The described options are depicted in Figure &amp;quot;Miscellaneous&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Allow ethernet activation on WCU ===&lt;br /&gt;
For WCUs of version 2.90.4 or later it is possible to choose whether or not to allow the WCU to use ethernet activation. Not allowing this might disturb some of the WCUs features.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Set 5V out on boot===&lt;br /&gt;
Option to set one of the output pins on the WCU to supply electricity at 5V to external equipment when the WCU is starting up. The option is visible for WCUs of model MX4 (except submodel V61) and with version 2.76.0 or later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Activate buzzer on detected digital input change===&lt;br /&gt;
Option to enable that the WCU makes a buzzing sound when a trigger-button (or other digital input) is activated on the WCU. It is possible on all MX4 models. The option is visible for WCUs with version 2.76.0 or later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Diagnostic firewall disable and PIN ===&lt;br /&gt;
Option to disable diagnostic firewall. Requires PIN. Visible for WCUs with version 2.89.0 or later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Diagnostic tester detection ===&lt;br /&gt;
Option to detect any diagnostic testers that they may not be interrupted, typically during OTA. Available for WCUs with version 2.96.0 or later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Manage templates==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Io config2.png|thumb|frame|Selecting Template]]&lt;br /&gt;
Admins can save configs as templates (see [[#Manage templates (for admins) | Manage templates (for admins)]]) and normal users can use these templates to fill all columns with the data stored in the template.&lt;br /&gt;
Clicking &amp;quot;Apply&amp;quot; will apply the selected template. You can always change settings or add more info, the template could be anything you need or just act as a starting point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If WMUs are enabled in the portal, a template will save the CANs from each WMU and when a template is selected the WMU CANs are applied 1:1 to each existing WMU in the configuration. &lt;br /&gt;
If there are no WMUs in the configuration the template&#039;s WMU CANs will not be applied, only the WCU&#039;s CANs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Manage templates (for admins)==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Io config3.png|thumb|frame|Manage Templates (admin view)]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Io config4.png|thumb|frame|Manage Templates (with WMUs enabled)]]&lt;br /&gt;
If you are an admin you have an extra button &amp;quot;Save current config as template&amp;quot; in the Manage configuration templates window. Clicking it to save the current configuration as a template will prompt you for a name. If the name already exists (case insensitive) a confirmation dialog will popup before overwriting.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, as admin you will be able to remove existing templates, which is done by clicking the red &amp;quot;Remove record&amp;quot; icon to the right of the template name. A confirmation dialog will popup to prevent deletion by mistake.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Show Vehicle Profile==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:WCU conf io car interf.png|thumb|Vehicle Profile]]&lt;br /&gt;
The button &amp;quot;Show vehicle profile&amp;quot; can be used to show, and hide, a panel showing the CAN and ethernet information for the connected car, see Figure &amp;quot;Vehicle Profile&amp;quot;. This option is disabled if no car is connected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Check PINs ==&lt;br /&gt;
Requires version 2.89.0 or later. Pressing &#039;&#039;&#039;Check PINs&#039;&#039;&#039; for a WCU will lookup existing PINs for HIA, HIB, and Diagnostic firewall disable. If available the PINs will be applied to their corresponding fields. If not all PINs are available there will be a pop-up specifying which PINs are unavailable and for which reason: either missing entirely or there exists a PIN for the ECU but for the wrong service area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For resource groups &#039;&#039;&#039;Check PINs&#039;&#039;&#039; will not apply any found PINs, instead if there are any resources with missing PINs it will specify, like for individual WCUs, which PINs are missing and for which WCUs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To apply PINs for resource groups see [[I/O configurations#Apply uploaded PINs|apply uploaded PINs]] below.&lt;br /&gt;
== Apply uploaded PINs ==&lt;br /&gt;
Option for resource groups to apply uploaded PINs for HIA, HIB, and Diagnostic firewall disable. Resets back to unchecked after saving the configuration. Visible for WCUs with version 2.89.0 or later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PINs must first have been be uploaded via either the &#039;&#039;&#039;Upload Vehicle PINs&#039;&#039;&#039; button in the vehicles tab (for multiple vehicles), or by right-clicking a WCU and selecting &#039;&#039;&#039;Upload Vehicle PINs&#039;&#039;&#039; (for a single vehicle). As of 2.94.0 the PINs may also be fetched from PIE via &#039;&#039;Administration&#039;&#039;-&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Resource group&#039;&#039;s&#039;&#039;,&#039;&#039; read more about fetching PINs from PIE [[The Portal Administrator View#The Resource Groups Tab|here]].&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Henrik.Moller</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.97&amp;diff=4124</id>
		<title>New features in v2.97</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.97&amp;diff=4124"/>
		<updated>2026-02-11T08:15:54Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Henrik.Moller: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Support for automatically generating passwords ==&lt;br /&gt;
Admins can now automatically generate a new password for a user directly from the User panel’s Change Password dialog. Learn more [[The Portal Administrator View#The User Tab|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Additional settings for ethernet interfaces on HMX for automotive Ethernet ==&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with version 2.97.0, the Ethernet interface settings on HMX have been expanded to include two additional fields for automotive Ethernet. The new fields are &#039;&#039;&#039;Role&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Speed&#039;&#039;&#039;. read more about it [[I/O configurations|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Configurable default time interval for alarms in portal ==&lt;br /&gt;
It is now possible to set a default alarm interval directly in the portal. Users can do this by right-clicking the &#039;&#039;&#039;Active Alarms&#039;&#039;&#039; column in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Vehicles&#039;&#039;&#039; tab or by navigating to the &#039;&#039;&#039;Alarms&#039;&#039;&#039; tab in &#039;&#039;&#039;Administration&#039;&#039;&#039; and clicking the &#039;&#039;&#039;Set Alarm Interval&#039;&#039;&#039; button. Read more [[Alarm|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== View mapping on task improvement ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SignalReaderView.png|thumb|Signal Reader View Task]]&lt;br /&gt;
The signal reader task view has been enhanced to show the mapped-from and mapped-to names for improved readability.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Henrik.Moller</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.97&amp;diff=4123</id>
		<title>New features in v2.97</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.97&amp;diff=4123"/>
		<updated>2026-02-11T07:59:46Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Henrik.Moller: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Support for automatically generating passwords ==&lt;br /&gt;
Admins can now automatically generate a new password for a user directly from the User panel’s Change Password dialog. Learn more [[The Portal Administrator View#The User Tab|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Additional settings for ethernet interfaces on HMX for automotive Ethernet ==&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with version 2.97.0, the Ethernet interface settings on HMX have been expanded to include two additional fields for automotive Ethernet. The new fields are &#039;&#039;&#039;Role&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Speed&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Configurable default time interval for alarms in portal ==&lt;br /&gt;
It is now possible to set a default alarm interval directly in the portal. Users can do this by right-clicking the &#039;&#039;&#039;Active Alarms&#039;&#039;&#039; column in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Vehicles&#039;&#039;&#039; tab or by navigating to the &#039;&#039;&#039;Alarms&#039;&#039;&#039; tab in &#039;&#039;&#039;Administration&#039;&#039;&#039; and clicking the &#039;&#039;&#039;Set Alarm Interval&#039;&#039;&#039; button. Read more [[Alarm|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== View mapping on task improvement ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SignalReaderView.png|thumb|Signal Reader View Task]]&lt;br /&gt;
The signal reader task view has been enhanced to show the mapped-from and mapped-to names for improved readability.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Henrik.Moller</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.97&amp;diff=4122</id>
		<title>New features in v2.97</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.97&amp;diff=4122"/>
		<updated>2026-02-10T12:14:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Henrik.Moller: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Support for automatically generating passwords ==&lt;br /&gt;
Admins can now automatically generate a new password for a user directly from the User panel’s Change Password dialog. Learn more [[The Portal Administrator View#The User Tab|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Additional settings for ethernet interfaces on HMX for automotive Ethernet ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Configurable default time interval for alarms in portal ==&lt;br /&gt;
It is now possible to set a default alarm interval directly in the portal. Users can do this by right-clicking the &#039;&#039;&#039;Active Alarms&#039;&#039;&#039; column in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Vehicles&#039;&#039;&#039; tab or by navigating to the &#039;&#039;&#039;Alarms&#039;&#039;&#039; tab in &#039;&#039;&#039;Administration&#039;&#039;&#039; and clicking the &#039;&#039;&#039;Set Alarm Interval&#039;&#039;&#039; button. Read more [[Alarm|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== View mapping on task improvement ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SignalReaderView.png|thumb|Signal Reader View Task]]&lt;br /&gt;
The signal reader task view has been enhanced to show the mapped-from and mapped-to names for improved readability.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Henrik.Moller</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=File:SignalReaderView.png&amp;diff=4121</id>
		<title>File:SignalReaderView.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=File:SignalReaderView.png&amp;diff=4121"/>
		<updated>2026-02-10T12:14:34Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Henrik.Moller: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;SignalReaderView&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Henrik.Moller</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.97&amp;diff=4120</id>
		<title>New features in v2.97</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.97&amp;diff=4120"/>
		<updated>2026-02-10T09:26:31Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Henrik.Moller: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Support for automatically generating passwords ==&lt;br /&gt;
Admins can now automatically generate a new password for a user directly from the User panel’s Change Password dialog. Learn more [[The Portal Administrator View#The User Tab|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Additional settings for ethernet interfaces on HMX for automotive Ethernet ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Configurable default time interval for alarms in portal ==&lt;br /&gt;
It is now possible to set a default alarm interval directly in the portal. Users can do this by right-clicking the &#039;&#039;&#039;Active Alarms&#039;&#039;&#039; column in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Vehicles&#039;&#039;&#039; tab or by navigating to the &#039;&#039;&#039;Alarms&#039;&#039;&#039; tab in &#039;&#039;&#039;Administration&#039;&#039;&#039; and clicking the &#039;&#039;&#039;Set Alarm Interval&#039;&#039;&#039; button. Read more [[Alarm|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== View mapping on task improvement ==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Henrik.Moller</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=Alarm&amp;diff=4119</id>
		<title>Alarm</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=Alarm&amp;diff=4119"/>
		<updated>2026-02-10T09:25:38Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Henrik.Moller: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;includeonly&amp;gt;=== The Alarm Tab===&amp;lt;/includeonly&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Alarms assists  in keeping track of the health and status of individual WCUs. Alarms are created for individual WCUs if certain conditions are met. Typically these conditions are indicators that suggest that a resource has encountered a problem, or has entered a state that could potentially be problematic or harmful. When an alarm is registered it shows up in the WICE portal under the Administration/Alarms tab. Using the Alarm panel a user can get an overview of any WCUs that requires attention in the form of a list. To further inspect the resource for which the alarm occurred it is possible to base a search in the vehicle- or task tab using a right click option. By default, the alarms from the last 24 hours are kept in the list. The list is updated automatically with new alarms once every 10 minutes. A figure of the alarm panel is on the right. An alarm consists of five components: a &#039;&#039;&#039;resource identifier&#039;&#039;&#039;, a &#039;&#039;&#039;time&#039;&#039;&#039;, a &#039;&#039;&#039;message&#039;&#039;&#039;, a &#039;&#039;&#039;severity&#039;&#039;&#039; and a &#039;&#039;&#039;category&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:The alarm panel.png|thumb|A set of alarms in the alarm tab.]]A &#039;&#039;&#039;resource identifier&#039;&#039;&#039; can basically take any form, it is a string that identifies the source of the alarm. In the case to the right there are three distinct WCU resources with id &#039;&#039;wcu::04-1B-94-00-20-8C&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;wcu::00-09-D8-02-B7-4A&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;wcu::04-1B-94-00-20-76&#039;&#039;. The currently existing identifiers in the alarm-tab are &#039;&#039;wcu::&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;rg::&#039;&#039;, the last of which can be used to search out all alarms for the WCUs currently included in the named resource group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Time&#039;&#039;&#039; is simply at what time the alarm was triggered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A &#039;&#039;&#039;message&#039;&#039;&#039; is a textual description of what happened. In this case it was because certificates are about to expire. The message looks as follows: &#039;Certificate expires on 20181019-184056 +02:00&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Severity&#039;&#039;&#039; is a way to communicate the urgency of the alarm. Severity is currently divided into two types, &#039;&#039;Error&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Warning&#039;&#039;. Error implies that something unexpected has happened which requires attention. Warning implies that a resource has entered a state that could potentially (but not necessarily) be harmful.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Category&#039;&#039;&#039; is a way to categorize an alarm. This is particularly useful for searching.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;remark&#039;&#039;&#039; column tells what has happened with the alarm. If it is empty, the alarm has simply been raised. If there are letter present the are either an &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;A&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;, which means acknowledged, or a &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;G&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt; which means that the alarm situation has been resolved either as a consequence of the acknowledgement or automatically. An example of where it has automatically been resolved is the case where the SD card in the WCU has reached, let us say, an 85% usage degree and later when data is uploaded the usage degree drops below 80%. By hovering over the remark column you will be presented with the date and user of when an alarm was acknowledged and with a date if it was automatically closed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the top is a set of controls to filter alarms based on other criteria than the text in the columns. Here it is possible to restrict the search to a specified time interval by checking the boxes &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;From&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;To&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;. It is also possible to only select one of the two thus searching for all alarms from a certain date or after a date. However, if the &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;To&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;-option is selected this means that the automatic update of alarms is temporarily switched off, which is notified with a warning icon. In addition, you can choose to include closed alarm by checking the box &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;Include closed alarms&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; and/or including acknowledged alarms by checking &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;Include acknowledged alarms&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;. It is only when either or both of these check boxes are checked that the remark column is populated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Functions ==&lt;br /&gt;
There are a few functions in this panel. You can &#039;&#039;&#039;update&#039;&#039;&#039; an alarm list, &#039;&#039;&#039;reload&#039;&#039;&#039; the alarm list, &#039;&#039;&#039;set&#039;&#039;&#039; new alarm interval, &#039;&#039;&#039;acknowledge&#039;&#039;&#039; an alarm and &#039;&#039;&#039;search&#039;&#039;&#039; among the alarms in the table.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Update alarm list ===&lt;br /&gt;
A said earlier, the list is automatically updated every 10 minutes. But if you feel like not waiting, simply press the &#039;Update alarms&#039; button. This will fetch new alarms from the server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Reload alarm list ===&lt;br /&gt;
By pressing &#039;Reload alarms&#039; button you will clear the current set of alarms and fetch a new set from the last 24 hours. Usually this is not needed but it is here for your convenience. The button needs to be pressed if you use and change the fetch interval.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== &#039;&#039;&#039;Set Alarm Interval&#039;&#039;&#039; ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AlarmIntervalSetting.png|thumb|Alarm Interval Setting]]&lt;br /&gt;
Clicking &#039;&#039;&#039;Set Alarm Interval&#039;&#039;&#039; opens a new window titled &#039;&#039;&#039;Alarm Interval Setting&#039;&#039;&#039; in the bottom-left corner. In this window, users can select the desired interval and confirm it by clicking the green button. Clicking the red button resets the alarm interval to the default setting.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the interval is changed, the &#039;&#039;&#039;From&#039;&#039;&#039; search range is automatically adjusted to match the selected interval in hours.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Acknowledge alarm ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Alarm acknowledge.png|thumb|200px|Comment dialog]]&lt;br /&gt;
When alarm is &#039;taken care of&#039; you can acknowledge this by pressing the button &#039;Acknowledge alarm&#039;. When doing so a dialog pops up providing to opportunity of adding a comment, presented in Figure &#039;Comment dialog&#039;. If there is no need to comment, simply leave the field empty and save. The alarm is thereafter marked as &#039;acknowledged&#039; with the remark A and if a comment is added it is also &#039;commented&#039; with the remark C. To view the existing comments for an acknowledged alarm, or to add new comments, mark it in the table and press the button &#039;Show comment&#039;. This will result in a panel appearing to the right of the table as can be seen in Figure &#039;Comment history panel&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Alarm comment panel.png|thumb|left|600px|Comment history panel]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The existing comments for the alarm is presented in a list in reversed chronological order along with date and user. To add a new comment press the &#039;Add new&#039;-button at the bottom of the panel. The panel can be hidden again by either pressing the &#039;Hide&#039;-button at the bottom of the panel or the &#039;Hide comment&#039; button at the bottom of the alarm table.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Search alarm ===&lt;br /&gt;
The alarms are presented in pages with 50 hits in each which are stepped through by the use of the arrow buttons at the bottom of the panel. To narrow down the search result, specify dates using the &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;From&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;To&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; options above the table and/o by entering search expressions for the resource, message, severity and category columns. When entering a value in one of these columns, it is interpreted as a regular expression and a search is performed. However, to search for alarms for WCUs included in a specified resource group, using the resource identifier &#039;&#039;rg::,&#039;&#039; the full name of the resource group needs to be entered. When the automatic update is run, or if the &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;Update alarms&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;-button is pressed, the new alarms which fit into the currently selected page, with search expression and ordering taken into consideration, is incorporated into the page content. If there exist new alarms which do not fit into the currently selected page an information icon appears on the &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;Update alarms&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;-button. It will disappear either when you choose to press the button, switch page or when the next automatic update is run and there are no new alarms outside the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Alarm fetch interval ===&lt;br /&gt;
At the top is a set of controls to filter alarms based on other criteria than the text in the columns. First out we have the checkbox &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;Use fetch interval&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;. Checking this box enables the two items &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;Time unit&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;Time interval&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;. This makes it possible to fetch alarms from more than 24 hours back. Its default setting is conveniently 24 hours.  The &#039;&#039;&#039;time unit&#039;&#039;&#039; says how the number should be interpreted, e.g. changing the &#039;&#039;&#039;time unit&#039;&#039;&#039; to Days while leaving the &#039;&#039;&#039;time interval&#039;&#039;&#039; at 24 will mean to fetch alarms from 24 days back. Available &#039;&#039;&#039;time units&#039;&#039;&#039; are &#039;&#039;&#039;hours&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;days&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;months&#039;&#039;&#039;. Also, you choose to include closed alarm by checking the box &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;Include closed alarms&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; and/or including acknowledged alarms by checking &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;Include acknowledged alarms&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;. It is only when either or both of these check boxes are checked that the remark column is populated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Block alarms ===&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes it might not be relevant to show all existing alarms in the portal. For instance, when an alarm is being handled but is not yet ready to be acknowledged. In such cases it is possible to block a set of alarms which fulfill certain requirements using the red alarm block icon in the right bottom corner of the table, see Figure &amp;quot;Block alarm for WCU&amp;quot;. To block alarms for one specific WCU, select it in the grid before pressing this button. The appearing window lists all existing alarm blocks. To create a new blockage, press &amp;quot;Block alarms&amp;quot; and enter the conditions in the appearing dialog, an example of which is presented in Figure &amp;quot;New alarm block&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Block alarm.png|thumb|400px|Block alarm for WCU]] &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New alarm block.png|thumb|left|150px|New alarm block]] &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alarms can be blocked for a specific WCU, selected in the grid, or for all WCUs. If the logged in user is an administrator, the blockage can be put in place for all users or for the current user. If this is not the case, the user options are hidden and alarms can then only be blocked for that user. Additionally, it is possible to select one or several severeties and/or categories to block. If no severity and/or category is selected the alarms of all severities/categories will be blocked. End with naming the alarm block and save it. It will now appear in the list as presented in Fiugre &amp;quot;Block alarm list&amp;quot; and from here it is possible to edit or delete it. Edit the block by either double-clicking the list tile or by pressing the pen icon. To delete it simply press the green alarm button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Block alarms list.png|thumb|left|150px|Block alarm list]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Available alarms ==&lt;br /&gt;
Presented below is the set of alarms currently available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Certificate expires ===&lt;br /&gt;
This alarm is identified with &#039;&#039;&#039;wcu::info::cert::expire&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;nowiki/&amp;gt;&#039;. Currently, alarms start to appear from 30 days of certificate expiry date. The alarm is triggered at most once per 24 hours.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Certificate not present ===&lt;br /&gt;
This alarm is identified with &#039;&#039;&#039;wcu::info::cert::not_present&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;nowiki/&amp;gt;&#039;. It means there is no certificate at all on the WCU. The alarm is automatically closed when the WCU reports that there is a certificate installed on the WCU. It is triggered at most once per 24 hours.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Certificate password missing ===&lt;br /&gt;
The alarm is identified with &#039;&#039;&#039;wcu::info::cert::password::missing&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;nowiki/&amp;gt;&#039;. There is a certificate on the WCU and the private key is encrypted but there is no password supplied to decrypt it with. As soon as correct a password is supplied this alarm will be automatically closed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Certificate unlock failed ===&lt;br /&gt;
The alarm is identified with &#039;&#039;&#039;wcu::info::cert::unlock::failed&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;nowiki/&amp;gt;&#039;. The most common problem to this alarm is that the wrong password has been supplied to decrypt the private key. As soon as correct a password is supplied this alarm will be automatically closed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sdcard usage ===&lt;br /&gt;
The alarm is identified with &#039;&#039;&#039;wcu::info::sdcard::use_percent&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;nowiki/&amp;gt;&#039;. An alarm is raised, currently, when the usage percentage of the SD card on the WCU is 80% or more. Alarms for this are triggered at most once every 24 hours. If the usage percentage is 95% or more, an alarm can be triggered up to once every 10 minutes. Once the usage percentage drops below 80% alarms are automatically closed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sdcard missing ===&lt;br /&gt;
The alarm is identified with &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;nowiki/&amp;gt;&#039;wcu::info::sdcard::missing&#039;&#039;&#039;. This means that the WCU has not been able to detect an SD-card when booting up and this is rather serious and should be investigated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Switch in INT position ===&lt;br /&gt;
The alarm is identified with &#039;&#039;&#039;wcu::info::start_switch::int&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;nowiki/&amp;gt;&#039;. An alarm is raised when the WCU reports that the switch is in the int position. It is automatically closed when the WCU reports that the switch is in position ext.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Unexpected powerloss ===&lt;br /&gt;
The alarm is identified with &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;nowiki/&amp;gt;&#039;wcu::info::shutdown::reason::powerloss&#039;&#039;&#039;. The reason could be that the cable powering the WCU has come loose or that it is not secured firmly enough.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Date and time on WCU is incorrect ===&lt;br /&gt;
The alarm is identified with &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;nowiki/&amp;gt;&#039;wcu::info::time::wrong&#039;&#039;&#039;. This alarm is largely due to a bad clock battery in the WCU, replace it.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Henrik.Moller</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=File:AlarmIntervalSetting.png&amp;diff=4118</id>
		<title>File:AlarmIntervalSetting.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=File:AlarmIntervalSetting.png&amp;diff=4118"/>
		<updated>2026-02-10T09:25:20Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Henrik.Moller: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;AlarmIntervalSetting&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Henrik.Moller</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.97&amp;diff=4117</id>
		<title>New features in v2.97</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.97&amp;diff=4117"/>
		<updated>2026-02-10T09:12:18Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Henrik.Moller: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Support for automatically generating passwords ==&lt;br /&gt;
Admins can now automatically generate a new password for a user directly from the User panel’s Change Password dialog. Learn more [[The Portal Administrator View#The User Tab|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Additional settings for ethernet interfaces on HMX for automotive Ethernet ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Configurable default time interval for alarms in portal ==&lt;br /&gt;
It is now possible to set a default alarm interval directly in the portal. Users can do this by right-clicking the &#039;&#039;&#039;Active Alarms&#039;&#039;&#039; column in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Vehicles&#039;&#039;&#039; tab or by navigating to the &#039;&#039;&#039;Alarms&#039;&#039;&#039; tab in &#039;&#039;&#039;Administration&#039;&#039;&#039; and clicking the &#039;&#039;&#039;Set Alarm Interval&#039;&#039;&#039; button. Read more here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== View mapping on task improvement ==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Henrik.Moller</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=The_Portal_Administrator_View&amp;diff=4116</id>
		<title>The Portal Administrator View</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=The_Portal_Administrator_View&amp;diff=4116"/>
		<updated>2026-02-10T09:03:39Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Henrik.Moller: /* The User Tab */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;An administrator can do everything a user can do and more. In addition to what a normal user can do, an administrator can create and modify users and stop tasks for any task. &lt;br /&gt;
These new functions will be explained in the next three chapters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We will start with the &#039;&#039;Search&#039;&#039; tab where two more buttons are visible. Next is the &#039;&#039;Vehicles&#039;&#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
Lastly is the &#039;&#039;Administration&#039;&#039; tab with five sub tabs consisting of: the &#039;&#039;Connect&#039;&#039; tab, the &#039;&#039;Archives&#039;&#039; tab the&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;GDS/SDDB files&#039;&#039; tab, the &#039;&#039;Resource Groups&#039;&#039; tab and the &#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==The Tasks Tab==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Illustration 32a.png|thumb|Stopping Running Task]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Illustration 32b.png|thumb|Force Stop Task]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition to the functionality for an ordinary user, an administrator the administrator can search and view any user&#039;s task. Also, it has one more button present. An administrator can send a &#039;&#039;Force Stop&#039;&#039; command to any WCU.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Figure &amp;quot;Stopping Running Task&amp;quot; shows the &amp;quot;Stop assigment&amp;quot; button. This button is the same as for the ordinary user and is used to stop a running task. When a running task is stopped, it changes state to &amp;quot;Stop pending&amp;quot;. This means that the portal is waiting for a stop message from the WCU before the state is changed to &amp;quot;Stopped&amp;quot; in the portal view. The administrator view&#039;s &amp;quot;Force Stop Task&amp;quot; button, which can be seen in Figure &amp;quot;Force Stop Task&amp;quot;, forces a &amp;quot;Stop pending&amp;quot; task into &amp;quot;Stopped&amp;quot; state without waiting for the stop signal from the WCU. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a portal of version 2.60 and forward, it is also possible for an administrator to remove all resultfiles for a selected task using the corresponding context menu option. When doing so, a confirmation dialog pops up to ensure that it is in fact the intended choice. Note that this option is disabled if multiple tasks are selected or if the selected task does not have any result files attached.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==The Vehicles Tab==&lt;br /&gt;
An administrator can do quite a lot of things in this view, an illustration of which is presented in Figure &amp;quot;The Administrator&#039;s Vehicles Tab&amp;quot;. The table header along with the buttons “Edit Description” and “Get Log Files” are explained in the page for &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Vehicles]]&#039;&#039;&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the bottom you have a set of buttons to aid in handling the WCUs. To add a new WCU to the portal, the “New” buttons opens up a dialog for that. The “Get Log Files” button fetches log files for the selected WCU from the portal.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Vehicles panel adm buttons Screenshot from 2023-06-28 15-06-17.png|left|thumb|800x800px|The Administrator&#039;s Vehicles Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The New WCU Dialog===&lt;br /&gt;
There are two ways that a WCU can enter the portal. The first is if you click the “New WCU” button and the second is the first time a WCU connects to the portal it registers itself. Ideally you will never have to add a WCU to the portal but just as a safety step you have the opportunity to add it yourself. When clicking the “New WCU” button the dialog presented in in Figure &amp;quot;The Add New WCU Dialog&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Illustration34.png|frame|left|The Add New WCU Dialog]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You must enter the ID of the WCU as this is a unique identifier and you will be notified if the ID is already present on the portal. The description is optional but may be handy to remember which WCU it is.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The Edit WCU Dialog===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To edit a WCU simply mark it in the table and press the button called &amp;quot;Edit WCU&amp;quot;. This results in a dialog where the fields differ depending on editability. For one selected WCU these are the comment, name, whether it is active or not, the labels for the WCU or if it requires approved assignments. However, if the WCU has tasks which have status pending, running, warning or error (or corresponding partial statuses), the active option is disabled. This is also true if the WCU is connected to a vehicle or if it is included in a resource group. By checking &amp;quot;Require approved assignments&amp;quot; you can only add assignments that have been reviewed and then approved by the reviewers. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Edit-wcu-2.87.png|alt=Edit a WCU|thumb|Edit a WCU Dialog]]&lt;br /&gt;
If the selected WCU is a resource group the dialog will appear as presented in Figure &amp;quot;Edit WCU Dialog&amp;quot;. The difference here is the &amp;quot;Apply label to resource group&#039;s WCUs&amp;quot;checkbox. When this option is selected the labels selected in the &amp;quot;Manage labels&amp;quot;-selector are also added to the WCUs included in the resource group. It is, though, not possible to remove labels from the resource group&#039;s WCUs using this checkbox. To do so use instead the context menu options for label management. [[File:Edit wcu.png|thumb|Edit a Resource Group WCU Dialog|left]]It is also possible to edit multiple WCUs simultaneously. If several WCUs are selected the dialog presented in Figure &amp;quot;Edit Multiple WCUs&amp;quot; appear. This is only possible for the fields &amp;quot;Comment&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Active&amp;quot; and these are enabled using the corresponding checkbox to the right. If one of the selected WCUs fulfill the conditions presented above for the disablement of the Active-option, it will not be possible to select the corresponding checkbox. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Edit wcu multiple.png|thumb|Edit Multiple WCUs|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Edit the WCU Configuration===&lt;br /&gt;
You can edit the configuration of the WCU from the portal. Simply click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit Configuration&#039;&#039;&#039; to open up a Tab in Figures &amp;quot;Edit Configuration: Modules&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Edit Configuration: Connection&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Edit Configuration: WCU&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Edit Configuration: Power Management&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Edit Configuration: Upload&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Edit Configuration: IO&amp;quot;, and &amp;quot;Edit Configuration: Extra bundles&amp;quot;. The WCU configuration window is divided into five tabs where each tab is described below.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=&amp;quot;150&amp;quot; mode=&amp;quot;nolines&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:ModulesTab.png|Edit Configuration: Modules.&lt;br /&gt;
File:ConnectionTab.png|Edit Configuration: Connection.&lt;br /&gt;
File:WCUTab.png|Edit Configuration: WCU.&lt;br /&gt;
File:PowerManagementTab.png|Edit configuration: Power Management&lt;br /&gt;
File:UploadTab.png|Edit Configuration: Upload.&lt;br /&gt;
File:IOTab.png|Edit configuration: IO&lt;br /&gt;
File:ExtraBundlesTab.png|Edit Configuration: Extra bundles.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Modules====&lt;br /&gt;
The set of checkboxes for the different modules that are present are at the top. Check or uncheck these to tell the WCU if they are present or not. Disabling modules will speed up the boot process of the WCU (but will make the corresponding functionality unavailable).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To edit &amp;quot;Car type&amp;quot;, click on the field where the car type is displayed to open the &amp;quot;Edit car&amp;quot; dialog. This dialog is described in section [[The_Portal_Administrator_View#The_Edit_Car_Dialog]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The last three checkboxes, &amp;quot;Run IDC at boot&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Run IDC at ignition off&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Enable VIN reader&amp;quot; are pretty much self-explanatory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Connection====&lt;br /&gt;
This tab can be seen in Figure &amp;quot;Edit Configuration: Connection&amp;quot;  and the tab content for the WLAN part is described [[WCU as WiFi Access Point|here.]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on site,i.e. is enabled, and if the WCU software is at least 2.90.0, an option of configuring a [https://www.wireguard.com/ WireGuard] VPN is available and described here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Remote Login =====&lt;br /&gt;
Determines if it is possible to connect to the WCU remotely - possibly configured with an active time limit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on the portal setup, the following modes are possible:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* None - not possible to specify a time limit.&lt;br /&gt;
* Optional - the user may specify a time limit.&lt;br /&gt;
* Required - the user must specify a time limit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If specified, the remote logon configuration will be automatically disabled after the limit has expired. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a time limit is active, the following is possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To enable remote login - select &amp;quot;Enable&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* To enabletime limit - select &amp;quot;Time Limited&amp;quot; and enter a value for hours.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Remote login add.png|thumb|Time limited remote login - Add]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a time limit is active, the following is possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To disable remote login - deselect &amp;quot;Enable&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* To disable time limit - deselect &amp;quot;Time Limited&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* To change the time limit - select &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot; and enter a new value for hours.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Remote login edit.png|thumb|Time limited remote login - Edit]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====WCU====&lt;br /&gt;
This tab can be seen in Figure &amp;quot;Edit Configuration: WCU&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;Unit ID&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The automatically generated unique WCU identifier. The ID is immutable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;Platform type&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The WCU platform type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;Platform subtype&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The WCU platform subtype.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;WCU software version&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
This is the currently installed WCU software version.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;Preferred WCU software&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
This is the new preferred WCU software version to be installed. When updating to a new version, the configuration dialog will update itself immediately to reflect what is available in the new version, hence accordingly also when downgrading. This means that new settings regarding the WCU&#039;s modules will also be upgraded which makes it possible to edit the modules according to the new version. In addition, when creating new tasks, validation will be carried out to the new version and hence you will not have to wait for the WCU to be updated to the new version to use new features.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;Perform reset on update&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Removes all data on the WCU when installing a new WCU software.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;MX4 firmware version&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The currently installed MX4 firmware version.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;Preferred MX4 firmware&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The new preferred MX4 firmware.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.40 of the WCU software, all WCUs report its platform type. The platform type determines, among other things, the number of available CAN buses in the IO tab. (see [[I/O configurations]]) Since a resource group is a collection of WCUs it has no platform type of its own to report. From version 2.41 of the portal the user has the option to set a fictive platform type for a resource group. This is also a prerequisite to also set the [[I/O configurations]] for a resource group. The platform type (and possibly subtype) is set in the WCU tab. If the resource group has members with other platform type(s) than the type that is about to be set, the user will get a warning.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the platform type of the resource group differs from the platform type of its members the I/O tab will be disabled. This is also the case when the platform type of the resource group and one member is the same but another member has another platform type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.42 it is possible to update the WCU root password. To update the password, write the new password in &amp;quot;Set root password&amp;quot; and save the configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;WCU Local Scheduling Time Zone&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a WCU of version 2.53 or higher it is possible to configure a local time zone for the WCU using the option &amp;quot;Local scheduling time zone&amp;quot; presented in Figure &amp;quot;Edit Configuration: WCU&amp;quot;. This field consist of a drop down menu displaying the selectable time zones, which are as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
* Universal&lt;br /&gt;
* Africa/Cairo&lt;br /&gt;
* America/Anchorage&lt;br /&gt;
* America/Caracas&lt;br /&gt;
* America/Chicago&lt;br /&gt;
* America/Denver&lt;br /&gt;
* America/Los_Angeles&lt;br /&gt;
* America/New_York&lt;br /&gt;
* America/Sao_Paulo&lt;br /&gt;
* Asia/Dhaka&lt;br /&gt;
* Asia/Dubai&lt;br /&gt;
* Asia/Hong_Kong&lt;br /&gt;
* Asia/Karachi&lt;br /&gt;
* Asia/Tokyo&lt;br /&gt;
* Australia/Adelaide&lt;br /&gt;
* Australia/Brisbane&lt;br /&gt;
* Australia/Darwin&lt;br /&gt;
* Australia/Sydney&lt;br /&gt;
* Europe/London&lt;br /&gt;
* Europe/Moscow&lt;br /&gt;
* Europe/Paris&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The zone defined here will be enforced selecting &amp;quot;WCU local time&amp;quot; when scheduling a task, see description [[Creating a Task#CAN-recorder#Scheduling|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;Blink Controller&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
For WCUs of version later than or equal to 2.54 it is possible to configure the blink controller for the WCU diods, which can be set to blink in different patterns to represent different WCU states. Selecting &amp;quot;Legacy&amp;quot; in the corresponding drop down menu will result in the WCU controlling the diods and the &amp;quot;DioIPD&amp;quot;-option means that the DioIPD will controll them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;Enable NTP Server&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enable or disable the NTP server by the use of a checkbox named thereafter for WCUs of version 2.60 or later. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;WCU Certificate&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wcu certficate three files.png|thumb|Files for Certificate Update]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the WCU is version 2.52 or later you have an opportunity to update the WCU&#039;s certificate and related files. If the conditions mentioned are met you will see a checkbox saying &amp;quot;Update certificate related files&amp;quot;, see Figure &amp;quot;Files for Certificate Update&amp;quot;. When checking the checkbox, an additional three fields are revealed. They are:&lt;br /&gt;
* Certificate file, choose a certificate file to upload which is in PEM format.&lt;br /&gt;
* Private key file, choose a private key to upload in PEM format as well.&lt;br /&gt;
* Password file, choose a file with the password to the private key. The file should be plain text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You must supply all three files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to see what certificate is installed on the WCU at any time, there is text field called &amp;quot;Current fingerprint&amp;quot;. If you have recently updated a WCUs certificate, you can by hovering over the field also see if the WCU is using the latest certificate. If this the case a message saying &amp;quot;Using latest certificate&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Renew WCU Certificate&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to renew a WCU&#039;s certificate by selecting the checkbox &amp;quot;Renew certificate&amp;quot;. Doing so will automatically issue a new certificate when the configuration is saved. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RenewCertificate.png|thumb|Renew Certificate]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Enable PTP ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ptp-setting-wcu.png|alt=PTP settings in the WCU configuration|thumb|PTP settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.81.0 of the WCU software there support for starting a PTP daemon on the WCU in order to synchronize time between units connected to the WCU. The protocol is designed to attain a higher accuracy than when using NTP. When you enable the setting you must also select to which interface on the WCU the daemon should listen on. You can see what it looks like in the illustration on the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Power Management====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Periodic wake up time.png|thumb|frame|Perodic Wake-up]]&lt;br /&gt;
This tab can be seen in Figure &amp;quot;Edit Configuration: Power Management&amp;quot; and the tab content is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Power mode” has two settings: &amp;quot;Sleep&amp;quot;, Deep sleep&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Cut-off&amp;quot;. In cut-off mode, the WCU is not woken up at regular intervals to report battery voltage, GPS position etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In sleep mode, some more settings are visible which also can be seen in Figure &amp;quot;Edit Configuration: Power Management&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
You can select the WCU to remain unpowered by selecting &amp;quot;External cut-off&amp;quot;, only available for the COMMITTO platform. In addition, you may enable the WCU&#039;s wake-up functionality. This function is simply made up of a cycle time called “Periodic wake-up time” and the corresponding “Periodic run-time”. The “Periodic run-time” determines how long time the WCU should be awake before going back to sleep. The “Periodic wake-up time” indicates the time for each new wake-up cycle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.43 it is also possible to set power mode to &amp;quot;deep sleep&amp;quot; for WCUs running on platform MX4 T20/T30 and MX4 V61. The configuration is the same as for mode &amp;quot;sleep&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Example: &#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
A periodic run-time of 600 seconds means that the WCU will be alive for 600 seconds (10 minutes). A periodic wake-up time of 3600 seconds means that the WCU will start a new run-time (600 seconds in this case) every new hour. (3600 seconds = 60 min). The sleep time in each cycle is, for the general case, the wake-up time minus the run-time and in this example 3600 minus 600 = 3000 seconds (50 min).&lt;br /&gt;
This example is illustrated in Figure &amp;quot;Perodic Wake-up&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.88.0 it is possible wake on a specific CAN frame ID. The settings are the same is for the canrecorder task. There it is possible to select one specific frame or several by separating them by “,”. It is also possible to select a range between frames by using “-”. The value can either be decimal or hexadecimal. A example of a filter: “1, 0x12-0xFF”&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--You can select the MCD-Hub to remain unpowered by selecting &amp;quot;MCD-hub cut-off&amp;quot;. In addition, you may enable the WCUs wake-up functionality. This function is simply made up of a cycle time called “Periodic wake-up time” and the corresponding “Periodic run-time” which indicates for how long I should be awake before going to sleep. The committo platform has some limits on the two settings and those are: minimum time to set between wake-ups is 10 minutes and the maximum time is 12 hours.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====WMU&#039;s Power Management====&lt;br /&gt;
If your Portal has [[WMU | WMU&#039;s]] enabled and you have added WMU&#039;s to the WCU Configuration in the [[I/O_configurations#Add_WMU(s) | I/O Configurations tab]], then the Power Management controls &amp;quot;Power Mode&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Wake on CAN&amp;quot; are present for each WMU with a tab of their own. These tabs are found at the top of the dialog window next to the WCU&#039;s Power Management tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Upload====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;upload tab wcu configuration&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This tab can be seen in Figure &amp;quot;Edit Configuration: Upload&amp;quot; and the tab content is described in the table below.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot; | Mobile upload limit&lt;br /&gt;
| Defines the maximum data size that should be transferred via the mobile network. If the data size is larger than that the WCU will wait until a connection to a local network can be established. The size is in Mbytes.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot; | Post run grace timeout&lt;br /&gt;
| The number of seconds to wait before communicating with the portal, if the ignition is turned off.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot; | Upload timeout&lt;br /&gt;
| The maximum number of seconds the WCU should upload data before stopping.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot; | Erase error code&lt;br /&gt;
| If turned on the error codes in the vehicle will be reset.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot; | Upload data at boot&lt;br /&gt;
| Uploads data when the WCU boots up.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot; | Upload data at ignition off&lt;br /&gt;
| Uploads data when the ignition of the vehicle is turned off.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Upload periodically&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|Uploads data every 10 minutes.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====IO====&lt;br /&gt;
Version &amp;gt;= 2.41 of the portal has a new tab named I/O. You can read more about in [[I/O_configurations]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Extra bundles====&lt;br /&gt;
[[Extra bundles|For more information about Extra bundles, click here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From portal version 2.47 and if the WCU is running 2.47 (or is about to be upgraded to 2.47) there is a new tab &amp;quot;Extra bundles&amp;quot; in the WCU configuration window, see Figure &amp;quot;Edit Configuration: Extra bundles&amp;quot;. In the tab, it is possible to select additional software to be installed on the WCU. The installation will start as soon as the WCU fetches the updated configuraton. This tab is only enabled if the current WCU is an MX4.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The Edit Vehicle Dialog===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Edit vehicle.png|thumb|200x200px|Edit One Vehicle]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Edit vehicles.png|thumb|204x204px|Edit Several Vehicles]]&lt;br /&gt;
To edit the information about a car, press the “Edit Vehicle” button. The dialog in Figure &amp;quot;Edit One Vehicle&amp;quot; opens up.The one entry you can not edit is the VIN entry. If you need to edit that you must instead create a new car.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order for the portal to be able to translate Diagnostic Trouble Codes into a human readable format, you must choose a diagnostic DB file to be used. It is important to select the correct one as the diagnostic trouble codes read out might be translated incorrectly or (more probable), not at all. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;ECU software readout type&amp;quot; parameter specifies the request used to obtain the software version identifier. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also important to select the right type of vehicle using “Vehicle type”. This controls the number of CAN buses and the number of Ethernet networks, if any, in the vehicle. If the selected vehicle is connected to a WCU in a resource group, strict or not, this option is disabled. To enable it it either has to be disconnected from the WCU or the WCU must be excluded from its resource group.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The “Active” check box controls whether the vehicle should show up in tables and searches in general concerning cars. A vehicle can never be removed as it has probably been involved in measurements but to recall an inactivated vehicle you must actively select to view inactivated vehicles. However, if the vehicle is connected to a WCU this option will be disabled from editing. In order to deactivate such a vehicle you need to first disconnect it from the WCU. It is possible to choose not to update history vehicles with the provided changes. This option should only used in specific cases and with a well grounded reason. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to update several vehicles at once by selecting multiple vehicles and then press the “Edit Vehicle” button. By doing this you can selectively make changes to attributes, except for the VIN and plate number, for all the selected vehicles at once. This is achieved using the extended dialog presented in Figure &amp;quot;Edit Several Vehicles&amp;quot;. The options which are to be edited for all vehicles must be selected using the corresponding checkbox. If not, the option is disabled, as for instance the &amp;quot;Comment&amp;quot;-option in the &amp;quot;Edit Several Vehicles&amp;quot;-figure.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Add Vehicle Dialog ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Add vehicle.png|alt=add car dialog|thumb|Add Vehicle dialog]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Save car response dialog.png|thumb|Response dialog when creating a new vehicle]]&lt;br /&gt;
Usually you do not have to create vehicles manually, they are created automatically by the WCU if they are not found. It is possible, however, to create a vehicle manually using the portal by pressing the button &amp;quot;Add Vehicle&amp;quot; in the vehicles panel. By doing so you will be presented with the dialog found on the right. Here you can set a number of attributes. Important to remember is that the field VIN is mandatory and must be unique among all vehicles registered on the portal. From version 2.57 of the portal the checkbox &amp;quot;Generate unique VIN&amp;quot; is present to the right of the input field VIN. By checking that box a unique VIN will be generated once you save the vehicle. The name consists of a prefix, which is centrally preconfigured, and a monotonically increasing integer number. After pressing save you will be presented with the following dialog (in the right below). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you have the opportunity to inspect the generated VIN and your other settings. You can either select to dismiss the dialog or go to the result which means that the newly created vehicle will be presented in the table in the vehicles panel.&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Upload a Vehicle Import File===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using &#039;&#039;Upload Vehicle Import File&#039;&#039;,&lt;br /&gt;
you can import vehicles using a [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Comma-separated_values csv file].&lt;br /&gt;
This can be used both to create&lt;br /&gt;
new vehicles&lt;br /&gt;
and optionally to update existing ones.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The header is a bit special:&lt;br /&gt;
a set of columns are treated specially,&lt;br /&gt;
and the rest are added to the resulting vehicle as labels.&lt;br /&gt;
The special column headers are listed below,&lt;br /&gt;
but are also the same fields you find in the [[#Add Vehicle Dialog|Add Vehicle dialog]].&lt;br /&gt;
These are case-insensitive&lt;br /&gt;
and the order of them does not matter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As mentioned,&lt;br /&gt;
remaining columns are interpreted as labels&lt;br /&gt;
and are added to all imported vehicles.&lt;br /&gt;
New labels are created as valued labels,&lt;br /&gt;
and are given an empty value for rows with empty data.&lt;br /&gt;
If there is data present,&lt;br /&gt;
it will be saved as the value of the label for the corresponding vehicles.&lt;br /&gt;
If the label already exists&lt;br /&gt;
but is not a valued label,&lt;br /&gt;
the column &#039;&#039;&#039;must&#039;&#039;&#039; be empty.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Special header values:&lt;br /&gt;
; VIN&lt;br /&gt;
: VIN specifying what car the row refers to. &#039;&#039;&#039;Required&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
; regNr&lt;br /&gt;
: License plate number.&lt;br /&gt;
; description&lt;br /&gt;
; project&lt;br /&gt;
; protoNumber&lt;br /&gt;
; tsu&lt;br /&gt;
; series&lt;br /&gt;
; profile&lt;br /&gt;
: Name of [[Vehicle Profiles|Vehicle Profile]]&lt;br /&gt;
; diagnostics&lt;br /&gt;
: Name of [[Vehicle Profiles#Manage Description files|Diagnostics DB]] file  &lt;br /&gt;
Full header for copying: &#039;&#039;VIN,regNr,description,project,protoNumber,tsu,series,profile,diagnostics&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Show or export SIM card ID ===&lt;br /&gt;
The SIM card ID for a single WCU can be seen when right-clicking on a WCU in the Vehicles tab and selecting &amp;quot;Show info&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SIM card ID&#039;s for one or multiple WCUs can also be exported as a csv file. Select the WCUs you are interested in (in the Vehicles tab) and press the button &amp;quot;Export SIM card info&amp;quot; located in the bottom row below the Vehicles grid. The downloaded file will contain five columns: WCU ID, WCU Name, RegNr (Plate nr), VIN and SIM Card ID. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Upload WCU file ===&lt;br /&gt;
The WCU attributes &#039;WCU Name&#039; and &#039;WCU Comment&#039; can from version 2.43 of the portal be updated for multiple WCUs via a comma separated txt/xls/xlsx file. Click the &amp;quot;Upload WCU File&amp;quot; button to open up the import file to upload dialog. Remember that this function is only for updating already existing WCUs, WCUs not existing cannot be added using this function.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The uploaded file has the following requirements:&lt;br /&gt;
* The file must have two mandatory columns with the names &#039;WCU ID&#039; and &#039;WCU Name&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* Furthermore, an optional column named &#039;Comments&#039; can be added. &lt;br /&gt;
* The columns should be in said order.&lt;br /&gt;
* The amount of columns on each row must match the amount of columns in the header. &lt;br /&gt;
* The columns should be separated by using tab or by a comma.&lt;br /&gt;
If there is a &#039;Comment&#039; column and a blank comment on a row then the old comment, if any, for the specific WCU will be kept. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To remove a comment from a WCU simply check the checkbox for erasing comments. Doing so will result in that empty comments in the uploaded file will erase current comments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Upload a file describing ECU pin codes for a vehicle ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Upload vehicle pins file Screenshot from 2023-06-28 15-22-22.png|thumb|Upload of a vehicle pin code file]]&lt;br /&gt;
ECU pin codes can be specific for a vehicle. This makes it possible to [https://wiki.alkit.se/wice284/index.php/Creating_a_Task#SWDL create an SWDL assignment] for multiple vehicles in one go. In order for this to work you must first prepare all such vehicles by uploading a file describing the different pin codes. When using the button &amp;quot;Upload Vehicles pins&amp;quot; multiple vehicles can be described in one file. The format of such a file is  row based where each row should be &#039;&#039;&#039;vin;ecu;pin&#039;&#039;&#039;. The ecu field is the hexadecimal address the ECU. When pressing the button &amp;quot;Upload Vehicles pins&amp;quot; you will be presented with the dialog found to the right.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Context-vehicle-pin-code-file.png|thumb|The context menu choice for uploading a ECU pin code file for a single vehicle.]]&lt;br /&gt;
There is also on option available with a context menu (right click a row) where a singe vehicle is targeted. The format of the file is the same except that no vin should be in the file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:Shelve and Unshelve a WCU}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Resource Groups==&lt;br /&gt;
As described above in [[Vehicles#Resource Groups]], you can define a set of resource groups in order to easily handle large groups of resources collectively. An example is if you have 100&lt;br /&gt;
WCUs in such a resource group and you would like to edit the configuration for all WCUs. Instead of having to open the configuration for each individual WCU, you simply open the configuration for the resource group, do your edits and when you press save, the configuration&lt;br /&gt;
will be saved to all WCUs in one go. Resource groups are created in the [[The Portal Administrator View#Resource group|Resource groups panel]], described further below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AddWCUtoResourceGroup.png|thumb|Adding Resources to Resource Group|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
==== Add a resource to a resource group ====&lt;br /&gt;
To add resources to a resource group you start by selecting the resources you are interested in adding to a resource group. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are satisfied with your selection, press the button “Add WCU(s) to resource group”. Pressing this button will show the dialog to the left. The group box will list the available groups. If you know the name of the resource group you can type the name and as you type the box will show names that fit what you type. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The two check boxes requires a deeper discussion. Assume you have a resource group that has been used for some time. A new WCU is registered on the portal and you would like to add that WCU to your group. A common situation is that you would like that WCU to be configured the same way as the rest of the WCUs in the resource group. This is accomplished by checking “Update WCU configuration”. If this requires an update of the WCU software it will automatically be taken care of. Also, a WCU comes pre-configured with a set of modules. Usually you will probably want to update the module configurations as well. In order to do so, it is required that you also update the WCU-configuration. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you leave the &amp;quot;Update WCU configuration&amp;quot; and/or &amp;quot;Update module configuration&amp;quot; unchecked, that selection of only in this instant. If you later change the resource group configuration (or module configuration), that change will be applied to all resources in the group. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ConfirmMovingResourceToResourceGroup.png|thumb|Dialog: WCU Moved to Another Resource Group|right]] &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==== Moving a resource between resource groups ====&lt;br /&gt;
In this same dialog it is also possible to move WCUs between resource groups. Just as with adding a WCU to a resource group, select the WCU(s) you wish to move and press the &amp;quot;Add WCU(s) to resource group&amp;quot; button. If a WCU already belongs to a resource group, that resource group is listed in the grid alongside the WCU. Select the desired resource group you wish to move the WCU to, in the group box and press the &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot; button. An information dialog will pop up, informing you that a WCU will move from one resource group to another. Press &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; to confirm the WCU moving to a new resource group or press &amp;quot;Cancel&amp;quot; to return to the previous dialog. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AddWCUToStrictResourceGroup.png|thumb|Adding/Moving WCU to Strict Resource Group.|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==== Requirements for moving or adding a resource to a strict resource group ====&lt;br /&gt;
When adding or moving WCUs to a strict resource group, it is required that the WCU shares the same platform type (and platform subtype, should one exist) and that a car is connected to the WCU (see [[Strict resource group|strict resource groups]]). Furthermore, updating the WCU-configuration and the module configurations are mandatory and, as such, these options are set and not able to be changed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Modules for the WCU==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot from 2021-09-10 15-34-09.png|alt=Tool configurations.|thumb|687x687px|Selecting Tool Configurations]]&lt;br /&gt;
Each WCU supports a number of modules. The modules are software components realizing specific functions, such as a measurement tool, a data source or software component. Some modules correspond to external measurement devices connected to the WCU, whereas other are built-in. This makes it possible to add new peripherals to the WCU for handling various tasks in acquiring measured data from a car. The set of currently available modules are:&lt;br /&gt;
# Area5&lt;br /&gt;
# Audio&lt;br /&gt;
# Blue piraT&lt;br /&gt;
# Canrecorder&lt;br /&gt;
# DLT&lt;br /&gt;
# DoIP&lt;br /&gt;
# ETAS&lt;br /&gt;
# Ethernet capture&lt;br /&gt;
# GPS&lt;br /&gt;
# IDC&lt;br /&gt;
# IPEmotion RT&lt;br /&gt;
# LPD&lt;br /&gt;
# M-log&lt;br /&gt;
# MCD-Hub (deprecated)&lt;br /&gt;
# MQTT&lt;br /&gt;
# Rapid Prototyping (RP)&lt;br /&gt;
# Signal Reader&lt;br /&gt;
# Smart Eye&lt;br /&gt;
# Soft-Hub&lt;br /&gt;
# State of Health (SoH)&lt;br /&gt;
# Software Download (SWDL)&lt;br /&gt;
# Uptime&lt;br /&gt;
# Video&lt;br /&gt;
# Vinreader&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To deal with each module&#039;s configuration a new view is presented below. To open this view, press the button “Modules” as shown in Figure &amp;quot;The Administrator&#039;s Vehicles Tab&amp;quot; in [[#The Vehicles Tab]].&lt;br /&gt;
In Figure &amp;quot;Selecting Tool Configurations&amp;quot; there are a set of tools present where each type is grouped on the left side using a stack panel. Show the Signal Reader settings by selecting the Signal Reader stack and select the Canrecorder stack to see the canrecorder settings and so forth.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each tool has its own entry in each of the stacks. In Figure &amp;quot;Handling Tool Configurations&amp;quot; there is only one MCD-Hub present and it is “0”. Each tool is recognized with a tool ID which is set by the WCU. This ID is usually not descriptive and therefore you have the possibility to set a name of your likings. Change the name by pressing the button “Edit name”. You can also add a description to the tool that shows up as a “tool tip” when hovering over the name of the selected tool. Analogously, change the description by pressing the button “Edit description”. To reload the set of available tools  press the “Reload” button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Below each tool configuration there messages are presented to indicate the module status. The different types of which are presented in Figure &amp;quot;Module Status Indicators&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=&amp;quot;200&amp;quot; mode=&amp;quot;nolines&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Modules no settings changed.png|Module Status Indicators&lt;br /&gt;
File:Modules settings not saved.png&lt;br /&gt;
File:Modules settings saved.png&lt;br /&gt;
File:Modules tool upgrade pending.png&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a module is selected, or reloaded, it will say &amp;quot;No settings saved&amp;quot;. In this mode the save-button is disabled and it will not be enabled until one of the settings is edited. Then the message &amp;quot;Settings not saved&amp;quot; appears until the save button is pressed. When the configuration is successfully saved, the status is updated to &amp;quot;Settings saved&amp;quot; and the Save-button is once again disabled. In addition, if there is a pending upgrade of the tool, this also will be indicated below the configuration panel.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot from 2021-04-09 10-54-55.png|thumb|Module status with information on when it was changed and by whom]]&lt;br /&gt;
In addition to the module status indicator above, a date and user will show when the configuration was changed and by whom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configure the Arcos Module ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ArcosNewModule.png|alt=Arcos-module|thumb|Arcos-module]]&lt;br /&gt;
As of version 2.71 of the portal, Arcos tasks can be created and these are the configurations variables that can be configured:&lt;br /&gt;
* Username&lt;br /&gt;
* Password&lt;br /&gt;
* Frontend number&lt;br /&gt;
*Current firmware&lt;br /&gt;
*Desired firmware&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Debug level]]&lt;br /&gt;
When configuring the module on a resource group level the username and password will be set on all resources in the resource group. The frontend number however, will not be updated on all the resources but rather retain the individual settings made on each resource.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order for the &amp;quot;Current firmware&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Desired firmware&amp;quot; field to show the WCU software version needs to be 2.85.0 or later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configure the Area5 Module ===&lt;br /&gt;
As of version 2.61 of the portal, it is possible to create Area5 tasks. The Area5 tool only has one configuration, the [[debug level]], which determines the level of logging during the execution of the Area5 tasks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configure the Audio Module ===&lt;br /&gt;
The audio module can be configured both regarding &#039;&#039;&#039;recording&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;monitoring&#039;&#039;&#039;. The recording settings refer to what is recorded on the WCU to disc to be uploaded, whereas the monitoring settings refer to the parameters used for monitoring live audio.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The available recording settings are:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Device&#039;&#039;&#039;, can be set to internal or USB, where default is internal&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Channels&#039;&#039;&#039;, can be set to either 1 (mono) or 2 (stereo), default is 2&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Sample rate&#039;&#039;&#039;, can be set to 48000, 44100, 16000 or 8000. Default is 48000. The unit is Hz.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Recording volume&#039;&#039;&#039;, can be set to a value between 0 and 100, where default is 95.&lt;br /&gt;
The available monitoring settings are:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Channels&#039;&#039;&#039;, 1 (mono) or 2 (stereo). Default is 1.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Codec&#039;&#039;&#039;, LPCM, GSM or G.711. Default is LPCM (Linear PCM 16 bits per sample, 16 kHz).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Destination IP address&#039;&#039;&#039;. This is the address to where the audio is sent for live monitoring.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable monitoring&#039;&#039;&#039;. In order to monitor audio live for an audio task, the module must be enabled for monitoring. If the task is enabled for monitoring but the module is not, no audio can be monitored live. Default is disabled.&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to have four audio sources simultaneously. To add a new source, simply press the button &amp;quot;Add audio source&amp;quot; and the corresponding settings will appear in a new tab. If there already is an audio source with device set to internal, the new device will have default device USB. However, if there is no previous device set to internal, this will be the default option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configure the Blue piraT Module ===&lt;br /&gt;
As of version 2.44 of the portal it is possible to create blue piraT tasks. The blue piraT tool only has one configuration, the [[debug level]], which determines the level of logging during the execution of the blue piraT tasks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configure the Canrecorder Module ===&lt;br /&gt;
The configurable settings for the Canrecorder module can be seen in Figure &amp;quot;Settings for the Canrecorder module&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modules Canrecorder.png|thumb|left|250px|Settings for the Canrecorder module]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the aforementioned figure, it is clear that this panel can be used to edit the speed on both the high- and low-speed CAN-buses. It is also possible to set the date for which the update is valid, the canrecorder version and the debug level.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configure the DLT Module ===&lt;br /&gt;
For WCUs with software version earlier than 2.72.0 the DLT module have two DLT-specific settings, one for the daemon address and one for the daemon port. Have a look [[DLT Module|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For WCUs with software version 2.72.0 or later, the daemon addresses and ports (several daemons are supported from this version) are instead specified when creating a [[Creating a Task#Diagnostic Log and Trace (DLT)|Diagnostic Log and Trace (DLT) task]]. The only thing specified in the module is the debug level - the level of logging from the WCU regarding its handling of this task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configure the DoIP Module ===&lt;br /&gt;
In figure &amp;quot;Settings for the DoIP module&amp;quot; the configuration for the DoIP module is presented.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Proxy address:&#039;&#039;&#039; The proxy address for the DoIP module.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Proxy port:&#039;&#039;&#039; The proxy port.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ID:&#039;&#039;&#039; The ID of the DoIP module.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Active session:&#039;&#039;&#039; Checkbox to let the DoIP module start announcing an ongoing synchronous diagnostic session. This is typically done by setting a LED on the WCU connected to the vehicle, signaling that a synchronous diagnostic session is ongoing. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Proxy address should usually be set to the localhost IP address 127.0.0.1 for technical reasons (it will be tunneled) and the proxy port number should usually be 6757. The ID is a textual string that identifies a particular user group that will gain access to the WCUs by configuring the client interface system with the same identifier. (This configuration is done at doipc install time.) All WCUs configured with the same ID will be reachable through the same client system interface. For more information see [[Remote Diagnostics over IP (DoIP)|Remote Diagnostics over IP (DoIP)]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modules DoIP.png|thumb|left|250px|Settings for the DoIP module]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configure the ETAS Module ===&lt;br /&gt;
In Figure &amp;quot;Settings for the ETAS module&amp;quot; the configuration panel for the ETAS module is presented. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modules ETAS.png|thumb|left|250px|Settings for the ETAS module]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This panel can be used to change the username and password as well as the debug level.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configure the Ethernet capture module ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot from 2021-04-01 09-34-02.png|thumb|Settings for the Ethernet capture module]]&lt;br /&gt;
The only available setting here is debug level.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configure the File fetcher module ===&lt;br /&gt;
The only available setting here is [[debug level]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configure the GPS Module===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot from 2021-04-01 09-36-42.png|thumb|Settings for the GPS module]]&lt;br /&gt;
There are four settings involved:&lt;br /&gt;
# Enable GPS. Sets whether the GPS should be enabled or not. If you disable the GPS all the other settings will also be disabled.&lt;br /&gt;
# GPS sampling interval. Sets the position sampling interval in seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
# GPS monitor enabled. If this setting is enabled the WCU will continuously send its GPS position to the portal enabling real-time monitoring of the whereabouts of the WCU.&lt;br /&gt;
# GPS monitor interval. Set how often the position will be updated. The interval is in seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configure the IDC Module===&lt;br /&gt;
The IDC module can be configured with which CAN bus to communicate with the vehicle. You can actually even choose both where it will first try the Ethernet network (ETH), if it exists, and the CAN bus. If the car type in question does not have an Ethernet network, only the CAN option will appear.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot from 2021-10-19 10-17-38.png|none|thumb|Settings for the IDC module]]&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.68.0 another option also exists where the file output format can be set.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with version 2.94.0, a new field called &#039;&#039;Tester Address&#039;&#039; has been introduced. This field offers three options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;External Diagnostics Test Equipment&#039;&#039;&#039; with a value of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;0x0E80&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;External Prolonged Data Collection Equipment&#039;&#039;&#039; with a value of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;0x0F80&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Other&#039;&#039;&#039;, which allows users to enter a custom value&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The standard range for custom values is between &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;0x0E80&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;0x0FFF&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, but users may also enter a value outside this range if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configure the IPEmotion RT Module===&lt;br /&gt;
The IPEmotion RT module can be configured with SFTP port, username and password.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configure the LPD Module===&lt;br /&gt;
The LPD module can be configured with a list of usernames. Each &amp;quot;Username&amp;quot; field represents one username in that list. Use the button next to the field to add another username.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configure the M-log Module===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot from 2022-04-21 16-11-28.png|alt=Settings for the M-log module|left|thumb|250x250px|Settings for the M-log module]]&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.75.0 of the M-log module there are two more fields present. They are &amp;quot;Current firmware&amp;quot; which is the last known firmware for the M-log logger. &amp;quot;Desired firmware&amp;quot; consists of a drop-down list a out-of-band firmware files present on the portal. Select one the files and the WCU will try to apply the firmware upgrade to the M-log as soon as possible.&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configure the MCD-Hub Module===&lt;br /&gt;
The MCD-Hub module is deprecated and should not be used anymore. The configuration for the MCD-Hub has only two settings. The first is the MCD-Hubs IP address and the second is is “MCD-Hub firmware version” which shows the current version used by the hub. The other two configuration settings  are the preferred firmware version and the second is “Last configuration update date” which states when the MCD-Hubs current configuration was brought into action.&lt;br /&gt;
When you are done with your configuration you save it by pressing the “Save” button. If you for any reason need to reload the configuration, press the “Reload” button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configure the MQTT Module===&lt;br /&gt;
The available settings for the MQTT Module is presented in Figure &amp;quot;Settings for the MQTT module&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modules MQTT.png|thumb|left|250px|Settings for the MQTT module]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This panel can be used to define an alternative host for the MQTT broker. Default is, as displayed in the illustration, localhost. Here you can also change the debug level for the module.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configure the RP Module===&lt;br /&gt;
For this module it is only possible to configure modify the debug level, see Figure &amp;quot;Settings for the RP module&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Illustration44.png|thumb|left|250px|Settings for the RP module]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
More information on how to use the RP module is found in the [[WICE RP Manual]] and the [[WICE RP How-To]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configure the Signal Reader Module===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Signal-reader-module-2.88.png|alt=Settings for the Signal Reader module|thumb|318x318px|Settings for the Signal Reader module]]&lt;br /&gt;
As of version 2.33 of the WCU software it is possible to monitor signals in real time. For this to happen you must enable the feature by checking the box “Enable monitor” illustrated in Figure &amp;quot;Settings for the Signal Reader module&amp;quot;. The monitoring can either be set as asynchronous or synchronous. In the former case, there is a regular signal communication with the portal and in the latter case with a specified destination port. For the synchronous case it is also possible to specify which transport protocol to use: TCP or UDP. The monitoring rate for both cases is set using the &amp;quot;Interval&amp;quot; field, where the default is once per second.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also here it is possible to define the debug level. Further, the module settings include selecting whether or not the MDF files are to be written upon recorder stop and the version of the generated MDF file. In the sampling section there are two main choices; whether or not to record samples on change and enabling/disabling of piecewise linear approximation (PLA). If samples are to be recorded on change, it is possible to also choose to include one sample before the change. With the choice of PLA comes the option of defining the error percentage for the signal range and the maximum segment length in number of samples.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thereafter you can select whether to aggregate ReadDataByIdentifier (service 22) diagnostic requests and which channel that should be used as the default diagnostics channel. Default interface can be CAN or DoIP and will affect the assignment that has the interface &amp;quot;Default Channel&amp;quot; selected and also the DREC. It is also possible to enter appropriate values for the diagnostics timeout. The timeout values determine how long time to wait for diagnostic responses before assuming that there are none. Typically, the timeout for sequence file diagnostics is set to a higher value due to the fact that it doesn&#039;t negatively impact the update frequency of active (diagnostics) signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.88.0 it is possible to select the MDF4 format when logging frames.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with version 2.94.0, a new field called &#039;&#039;Tester Address&#039;&#039; has been introduced. This field offers three options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;External Diagnostics Test Equipment&#039;&#039;&#039; with a value of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;0x0E80&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;External Prolonged Data Collection Equipment&#039;&#039;&#039; with a value of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;0x0F80&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Other&#039;&#039;&#039;, which allows users to enter a custom value&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The standard range for custom values is between &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;0x0E80&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;0x0FFF&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, but users may also enter a value outside this range if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configure the SmartEye Module===&lt;br /&gt;
The configuration for this module is identical to that of the RP module, depicted in Figure &amp;quot;Settings for the RP module&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configure the Soft-Hub===&lt;br /&gt;
As for the RP and Smarteye module, its only editable parameter is the debug level using a panel as displayed in Figure &amp;quot;Settings for the RP module&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configure the State of Health Module===&lt;br /&gt;
The state of health module has the same settings as the IDC module above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configure the Software Download Module===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The SWDL module has the same settings as the IDC module above apart from one difference highlighted in red in Figure &amp;quot;Settings for the Software Download Module&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modules SWDL.png|thumb|left|250px|Settings for the Software Download Module]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For WCUs of version 2.53 and forward it is possible to allow updates to be performed without manual interaction by checking the high-lighted checkbox. If this option is chosen, the updates will instead be performed as soon as possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configure the Uptime Module===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This module is used to report how much and how long the WCU is running and its configuration is set using the panel displayed in Figure &amp;quot;Settings for the Uptime Module&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Illustration43.png|thumb|left|250px|Settings for the Uptime Module]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First of all you can enable/disable the functionality all together with the “Enabled” checkbox. Next is how often the up-time should be logged in seconds. The second check box, “Monitor enabled” is used when you would like the module to report its up-time in real-time and the interval for that, also in seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configure the Video Module ===&lt;br /&gt;
A description of how to configure the video module can be found here. An explanation of the module in more general terms is found in the [[WICE video]] section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The video module can be configured both regarding the recording and the monitoring. The recording parameters refers to what is recorded on the WCU to disc to be uploaded, whereas the monitoring parameters refer to the live video that is streamed from the WCU.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The available &#039;&#039;&#039;recording&#039;&#039;&#039; settings are:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Width&#039;&#039;&#039;, which is the width in pixels of the recorded video.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Height&#039;&#039;&#039;, which is the height in pixels of the recorded video.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Frame rate&#039;&#039;&#039;, which is the number of video frames per second to be recorded.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Codec&#039;&#039;&#039;, which is the video codec used when recording video clips to disc. Avaliable codecs are JPEG and VP8. (Note that the video that is uploaded to the portal is typically transcoded to MPEG-4 format, and codec only refers to the recording phase in the WCU.)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Clip size&#039;&#039;&#039;, which is the size in seconds or bytes of clips recorded on the WCU. The clips are subsequently concatenated on the Portal, if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Clip unit&#039;&#039;&#039;, which is the unit for the clip size setting (bytes or seconds).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The available &#039;&#039;&#039;monitoring&#039;&#039;&#039; settings are:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable monitoring&#039;&#039;&#039;, which enables or disables monitoring of video.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Width&#039;&#039;&#039;, which is the width in pixels of the monitored video.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Height&#039;&#039;&#039;, which is the height in pixels of the monitored video.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Frame rate&#039;&#039;&#039;, which is the number of video frames per second to be recorded.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Codec&#039;&#039;&#039;, which is the video codec used when streaming monitored video. Avaliable codecs are JPEG and VP8.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Destination IP address&#039;&#039;&#039;, which is the IP address to which monitored video is transmitted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is also a setting for rotating the video, to be used if the camera is installed upside-down or at a 45 degree angle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configure the Vinreader Module ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SettingForTheVinReaderModule.png|alt=Settings for the Vinreader module|thumb|250x250px|Settings for the Vinreader module]]&lt;br /&gt;
The method of reading a vehicle&#039;s VIN (Vehicle Identification Number) can be set to &#039;&#039;&#039;SPA29&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;OBD2&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;SPA11, BP, TEA2+, UDS, DoIP&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;, SOVD&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;FIXED&#039;&#039;&#039;. The preferred setting for this is OBD2, whereby a standardized OBD-II diagnostic service is used to read out the VIN. SPA29 and SPA11 refers to using CAN diagnostic requests using either 29 bit or 11 bit SPA addressing respectively. The CAN channel (on the WCU) is selected in &#039;Default CAN channel&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the setting FIXED is used, the VIN will not be read from the vehicle using a diagnostic service, but rather a preset value entered in the item named &#039;Fixed VIN&#039; is used. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot from 2022-04-22 09-09-21.png|alt=Vehicle ID method type|thumb|Vehicle ID method type]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot from 2022-04-22 09-55-55.png|alt=No identifying label selected|thumb|No identifying label selected]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Skärmavbild 2019-12-18 kl. 15.17.58.png|thumb|Audio module settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;Save VIN&#039; is a checkbox for save vin. As default the box is checked which means that it will save the VIN number if the WCU can successfully read it. If the &#039;Save VIN&#039; is unchecked then the WCU will try to read the VIN number every time it boots.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are currently two ways of identifying a vehicle, either by reading the VIN or the chassis number. The selection is shown in Illustration &#039;Vehicle ID method type&#039; to the right. When using &#039;Chassis NO&#039; as identification type you must select which valued label to use for this mechanism. If no such label has been selected, you will see the the text &#039;No label selected in backend&#039; to the right of the selected type, see Illustration &#039;No identifying label selected&#039; on the right. To select which label to use, head over to the [[Labels#Administer labels|label administration tab]] to make the selection. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with version 2.94.0, a new field called &#039;&#039;Tester Address&#039;&#039; has been introduced. This field offers three options: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;External Diagnostics Test Equipment&#039;&#039;&#039; with a value of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;0x0E80&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;External Prolonged Data Collection Equipment&#039;&#039;&#039; with a value of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;0x0F80&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Other&#039;&#039;&#039;, which allows users to enter a custom value&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The standard range for custom values is between &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;0x0E80&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;0x0FFF&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, but users may also enter a value outside this range if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; For the &#039;&#039;Tester Address&#039;&#039; field to appear in this module, the vehicle&#039;s VIN must be set to &#039;&#039;&#039;SPA29&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New-vinreader-7.png|thumb|New setting in VINReader 2.96.0, only request VIN if unknown]]&lt;br /&gt;
From version &#039;&#039;&#039;2.96.0&#039;&#039;&#039; of the WCU a new setting &amp;quot;Only request VIN if unknown&amp;quot; is available. If checking this option, VINReader will not make a request on the bus if VIN is already known making it silent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==The Administration Tab==&lt;br /&gt;
This tab is a collection of the administrative tasks available in the portal. These are “Connect car to WCU”, “Archives”, “GDS/SDDB file”, “Resource Groups”, “Users”, &amp;quot;Labels&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;WCU Status&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Key Figures&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The Connect Car to WCU Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To archive which vehicle a specific WCU was in at the time a task was run can be done by connecting a vehicle to a WCU in this tab. This is usually done automatically but in some situations it is necessary to do this manually&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The area is divided into two tables, one for searching WCUs, the left one, and one for searching vehicles, the right one. When you start typing the name of the WCU you are looking for in the upper left corner just above the table, matching WCUs appear in the left table. To find the vehicle you are looking for, you do the same in the right table but here you have the option of using either the VIN or plate number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To connect a WCU with a vehicle you drag the WCU you would like to connect onto the vehicle in the right table. When you drop it onto a car a small icon will show signifying that the WCU and vehicle are connected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.42 it is also possible to select a WCU and a Car and then click on the new &amp;quot;Connect&amp;quot; button located between the two grids.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To disconnect a WCU and car you simply press the icon for wither of the WCU or car.&lt;br /&gt;
See Figure &amp;quot;Connect Cars to WCU&amp;quot; for an example.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Illustration 45.png|thumb|frame|left|600px|Connect Cars to WCU]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The connection is a sort of instantaneous carbon copy of the situation at the time that a task was created. If you later change the connection, already running/run tasks will not be affected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The Resource Groups Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
This tab is used to administer some parts of the creation and destruction of resource groups and more. The panel for administering the resource groups is depicted in the Figure &amp;quot;Resource Group Tab&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Resource-groups-administration.png|left|thumb|800x800px|Resource Group Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the top is a search field to search for resource groups. Next are two tables, side by side. The left table lists the resource groups found depending on your search criteria. When a resource group is selected, the resources that are part of the resource group are shown in the right table. Next, the functionality of the buttons will be covered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Add and Remove Resource Groups====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CreateNewResourceGroup.png|thumb|Add Resource Group Dialog]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add a resource group you simply press the “New resource group” button and the following window will show. Here you can type the name for the new resource group, set the resource group as strict (see [[Strict resource group|Strict Resource Groups]]) and, if you choose to set the resource group as strict, set what platform type and platform sub type it should have. When you feel satisfied with your selections press “Create” to create the resource group. If you change your mind, press the “Cancel” button. Resource groups are global and writable and that means that names must be unique. The reason for this is that a resource group name takes on the form as both the resources car and WCU and those must be unique and therefore the resource groups must also be unique. One can, however, imagine situations where this must not be enforced but at the moment this is the case.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To remove a resource group, press the “Remove resource group” button. Be aware that no warning is given if there are resources in the group when removing it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Copy Resource group ====&lt;br /&gt;
If you have set up the configuration for a resource group it is sometimes convenient to make a copy of the resource group under a new name. To do this, select the resource group you would like to copy and press &amp;quot;Copy resource group&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Default labels ====&lt;br /&gt;
Default labels are a group of labels that will be associated with WCU or/and vehicle when a WCU joins a resource group. These labels will not affect current WCU/Vehicles in the resource group. To edit the set of labels press the “Edit default labels” button. New window will show. Read more about the edit default labels window [[Edit default labels window|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Approved Assignments ====&lt;br /&gt;
You can require that assignments must have been reviewed and approved before they can be applied to a resource group by checking the box &amp;quot;Require Approved Assignments&amp;quot;. If an assignment does not meet these criteria, the assignment will not be applied to the resource group. Read more about the assignment review process [[Review assignment process|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Fetch PINs ====&lt;br /&gt;
For portals with VCF enabled there will be a button &#039;&#039;&#039;Fetch PINs&#039;&#039;&#039; that will connect with PIE to fetch any available PINs for the resources in the group. These PINs can then be applied to the VCF configurations of the group. Read more about VCF [[Vehicle Communication Forwarder|here]] and about applying the fetched PINs [[I/O configurations#Apply uploaded PINs|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Manipulating Resources in a Resource Group====&lt;br /&gt;
In the right hand table in Figure &amp;quot;Manipulating Resources in Resource Group&amp;quot;, you see a set of resources for a resource group. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Rg.png|left|thumb|800x800px|Manipulating Resources in Resource Group]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here are both WCUs and cars part of the group. In addition to the type there is a column named “Status”. That column only applies to WCUs. The use of this column is as follows. Assume you have a resource group consisting of 50 WCUs. Further, lets make a configuration change to that resource group. Depending on where the WCUs geographically are and how they are used the WCUs will be updated at different times. How do you you know when all WCUs are up to date in the resource group? You could check them individually in the “Vehicles” panel but that is not very elegant and time saving. Instead, just watch the “Status” column for the WCUs. When a WCU is up to date with respect to the group configuration the color in the column will be green. The value is updated each 30 seconds. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The different color values are: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Red ===== &lt;br /&gt;
The WCU&#039;s configuration was edited after the resource group&#039;s configuration was saved. The WCU will never use the resource group&#039;s configuration. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Yellow ===== &lt;br /&gt;
The WCU&#039;s configuration is the same as the resource group&#039;s but the WCU has not yet updated to this configuration. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Green ===== &lt;br /&gt;
The WCU has updated to the resource group&#039;s configuration. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can remove individual resources from a group by selecting the resource and then press the “Remove resource” button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yet another button remains and it is the button “Base Group on Resource”. When you add a WCU to a resource group in the “Vehicles” panel you have the option of not updating the WCU configuration to match the one of the resource group&#039;s, see Figure &amp;quot;Dialog: WCU Moved to Another Resource Group&amp;quot; in [[#Resource Groups]]. Using this function it is possible to base the whole group on a WCU&#039;s configuration rather than the group&#039;s configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== The Vehicle Profiles Tab ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This tab is further described [[Vehicle Pofiles|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== The Alarm Tab ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This tab is further described [[Alarm|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The User Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Illustration46.png|border|800x800px]]The basic layout of the areas is just the same here as before. At the top you have a search area, in the middle is a result are and at the bottom are a set of buttons. The tab with a set of example users is in the Figure &amp;quot;User Administration Tab&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
The nine columns are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;User ID&#039;&#039;&#039;. The unique ID that the user must enter when logging in.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Name&#039;&#039;&#039;. The name of the user.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Roles&#039;&#039;&#039;. Depending on which roles the user has to, he/she have different privileges. The roles are non-overlapping, i.e. being an “Admin” does not necessarily mean that you can do everything a “User” can do.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Enabled&#039;&#039;&#039;. Tells whether the account is enabled or not.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Email Address&#039;&#039;&#039;. By registering an email address a user can receive notifications via email from a WCU when certain event occurs.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Last login date&#039;&#039;&#039;. The date when the user last logged in.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Two factor auth&#039;&#039;&#039;. Whether the two-factor authentication is turned on for a particular user.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Logged in&#039;&#039;&#039;. You can see if the user is currently logged in.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Creation Date&#039;&#039;&#039;. The date of when the user was created. Only visible on users created after December 3 2020.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the bottom there are eight buttons. They are:&lt;br /&gt;
# The “New” button brings up the “New User” dialog which adds a new user to the portal&lt;br /&gt;
# The “Edit” button brings up the “Edit User” dialog&lt;br /&gt;
# The “Change Password” button brings up a dialog to change a user&#039;s password. [[File:AutoGeneratePassword.png|thumb|Change password dialog]]Starting with version 2.97.0, users can automatically generate a new password. In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Change Password&#039;&#039;&#039; dialog, a button appears to the right of the &#039;&#039;&#039;New Password&#039;&#039;&#039; field. Clicking this button generates a password and displays an additional field containing the generated password.  The generated password can be copied using the &#039;&#039;&#039;Copy to clipboard&#039;&#039;&#039; button next to the field. Note that the auto-generated password is saved only after clicking the &#039;&#039;&#039;Change&#039;&#039;&#039; button; generating the password alone does not save it.&lt;br /&gt;
# The “Create new secret” button. Pressing this generates a new cryptographic salt to be used when generating one-time passwords. If you do this for a user without enabling the possibility to see the secret on the next login, renders the user unable to login to the portal. No dialog is opened, simply a message saying that a new one has been generated is shown.&lt;br /&gt;
# The “Show secret” button. Shows a dialog with the cryptographic salt shown in clear text as well as the QR-code, more on this later.&lt;br /&gt;
# Edit roles and permissions&lt;br /&gt;
# The “Save headers” button. Saves the headers and their order to be used as default on later logins.&lt;br /&gt;
# Video. Start a video conversations with another user of the portal. You must have the software “Confero” installed for this to work.&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.93 of the portal it is also possible for an admin user to impersonate another user. See [[New features in v2.93]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====The New User Dialog====&lt;br /&gt;
By pressing the “New User” button the dialog appears as presented in Figure &amp;quot;New User Dialog&amp;quot;. Mandatory fields are User ID and the two password fields. Remember that the User ID must be unique and you will be notified if it is not. Add the roles that you want the user to have by moving roles from the left list to the right. You can hover each role to view more information about them. Click the “Add” button to add the user or change you mind by clicking “Cancel”. If you click &amp;quot;Add&amp;quot; and the roles you have selected gives the user access to some wcus tasks, you will also be prompted about giving the user access to currently running tasks on these wcus as well. This can also be done when editing the roles of a user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the new user has been created, that user is granted a default minimalistic view in both the Tasks- and Vehicles-panel. This mechanism exists to prevent new users from being overwhelmed by the large amount of columns available in these panels. Instead, they are only presented with the most important columns, with the option to see more columns if they want to. The default columns for new users are:&lt;br /&gt;
* Tasks panel&lt;br /&gt;
** Task ID&lt;br /&gt;
** Assignment name&lt;br /&gt;
** Assignment type&lt;br /&gt;
** WCU ID&lt;br /&gt;
** Status&lt;br /&gt;
** Task creator&lt;br /&gt;
** Creation date&lt;br /&gt;
** Resource group&lt;br /&gt;
* Vehicles panel&lt;br /&gt;
** WCU ID&lt;br /&gt;
** VIN&lt;br /&gt;
** WCU comment&lt;br /&gt;
** WCU software version&lt;br /&gt;
** WCU connection time&lt;br /&gt;
** Resource group&lt;br /&gt;
** Active alarms&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:NewUserDialog252.png|left|thumb|New User Dialog]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PromptNewUserCurAss.png|left|thumb|Prompt to give user permission to currently running tasks on specified wcus]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====The Edit User Dialog====&lt;br /&gt;
You can at any time modify a user by pressing the “Modify” button to bring up the dialog in Figure &amp;quot;Modify User Dialog&amp;quot;. The User ID cannot be changed. A disabled account can not be used for logging onto the portal even if the correct user name and password are given. To modify the user roles, select or deselect a role by using the check boxes. To turn on two-factor authentication for a user, check the appropriate box. When you are satisfied with your modifications, press the “Save” button to make them permanent on the portal or press the “Cancel” button if you change your mind.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To enable two factor authentication, tick the check box “Enable two factor authentication”. This will force the user to add another special one time password in addition to the account password when logging into the portal. The one time password is generated by a program on either your computer or if you want to you can install it on your smart phone which is probably the best solution. The program that generates one time password is based on a cryptographic salt and the current time. The cryptographic salt is randomly generated by the portal and is individual for each user. A secret can at any time be regenerated for a user which will render the user unable to login if you do not tick the check box “Show the secret to the user on their next login”. Advice the user to install &amp;quot;Google Authenticator&amp;quot; on their phone before they login to the portal for the first time as the secret will only be shown once and must be installed in the authenticator app at that time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Just like when adding a new user, you can give or remove roles to the user by clicking &amp;quot;Edit user roles&amp;quot; and moving roles from the left list to the right and vice versa. If you edit the user roles to add some wcu task permission to the user, you will also here be prompted about giving the user access to currently running tasks on these wcus as well.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EditUser252.png|left|thumb|Modify User Dialog]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====The Change Password Dialog====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change a user&#039;s password, press the “Change Password” button and the dialog below will appear. It is pretty straightforward as you type in the new password in the “New password” entry and you need to confirm it by typing it again in the entry below it. If you are satisfied, click the “Change” button or the “Cancel” button if you decide not to change the password.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Illustration49.png|thumb|frame|left|Change Password Dialog]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====The Show Secret Window====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Illustration50.png|thumb|frame|QR-code Window]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A QR-code is shown that can be transferred to a smart phone by simply starting the authenticator app (we recommend using &amp;quot;Google Authenticator&amp;quot;), point it at the screen and let the phone read the QR-code. An example of such a QR-code can be seen in Figure &amp;quot;QR-code Window&amp;quot;. If the application that is to be used as a password generator do not support QR codes, the secret is shown in clear text at the top.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Edit User Roles and Permissions ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here it is also possible to edit user roles and permissions, read further instructions [[Roles and permissions|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== The Labels Tab ===&lt;br /&gt;
This tab is used to administer labels. Here you can enable/disable labels, rename labels which are not system labels and it is possible to make private labels global. If the feature is enabled at your site, it is also possible to configure label announcements here. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
More about these functions can be found in [[Labels#Administer labels|Administer Labels]]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The WCU Status Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.47 the WCU status tab has changed. See [[WCU Status]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;The Following applies to portal version 2.46 and older:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This view is supposed to be used for supervising a set of vehicles. The supervision is done in real time and the values for the set of vehicles are updated as soon as they arrive on the server from the different vehicles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The set of status information collected comprises three parts:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;General information:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Alive, a heart beat signal&lt;br /&gt;
* Connectivity, what data rates are currently available to the vehicle.&lt;br /&gt;
** 4G&lt;br /&gt;
** 3G&lt;br /&gt;
** 2G&lt;br /&gt;
** none&lt;br /&gt;
* Cell Signal Quality (CSQ). Indicates the signal strength of the mobile modem. The values are between 0 – 31, the higher the value the better. The special value of 99 is designated an unknown or not even detectable signal.&lt;br /&gt;
* GPS, simply a binary indicator of fix or no fix for the GPS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Data Storage Usage:&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This set of data informs how much collected data resides in the WCU for each type of data collector (module). Total data indicates how much of the total amount of data storage available is used. After that, each type of data collector is lined up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Data Collection Status:&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When modules collect data they go through a set of states when triggers starts, stops and other events occur. Currently, only such events for the signal reader module is available. An optional message accompanying the current state is shown in parenthesis.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen is divided in two parts, on the left hand side is a table with search functionality for finding the vehicles of interest and on the right hand side is the monitored vehicles. To monitor a vehicles you search for it in the table and then drag and drop the vehicle on the right hand panel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A view of the panel is depicted in the Figure &amp;quot;WCU Status Tab&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Illustration57.png|left|frame|WCU Status Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The Key Figures Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this tab it is possible to view charts over recorded statistics for the portal. More about this option is found under [[Key Figures]].&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Henrik.Moller</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=File:AutoGeneratePassword.png&amp;diff=4115</id>
		<title>File:AutoGeneratePassword.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=File:AutoGeneratePassword.png&amp;diff=4115"/>
		<updated>2026-02-10T09:03:00Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Henrik.Moller: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;AutoGeneratePassword&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Henrik.Moller</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.97&amp;diff=4114</id>
		<title>New features in v2.97</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.97&amp;diff=4114"/>
		<updated>2026-02-10T08:51:25Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Henrik.Moller: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Support for automatically generating passwords ==&lt;br /&gt;
You can now automatically generate a new password for a user directly from the User panel’s Change Password dialog. Learn more [[The Portal Administrator View#The User Tab|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Additional settings for ethernet interfaces on HMX for automotive Ethernet ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Configurable default time interval for alarms in portal ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== View mapping on task improvement ==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Henrik.Moller</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.97&amp;diff=4113</id>
		<title>New features in v2.97</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.97&amp;diff=4113"/>
		<updated>2026-02-10T08:47:38Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Henrik.Moller: /* Support for automatically generating passwords */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Support for automatically generating passwords ==&lt;br /&gt;
You can now automatically generate a new password for a user directly from the User panel’s Change Password dialog. Learn more here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Additional settings for ethernet interfaces on HMX for automotive Ethernet ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Configurable default time interval for alarms in portal ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== View mapping on task improvement ==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Henrik.Moller</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.97&amp;diff=4112</id>
		<title>New features in v2.97</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.97&amp;diff=4112"/>
		<updated>2026-02-09T08:39:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Henrik.Moller: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Support for automatically generating passwords ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Additional settings for ethernet interfaces on HMX for automotive Ethernet ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Configurable default time interval for alarms in portal ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== View mapping on task improvement ==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Henrik.Moller</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=The_Portal_Administrator_View&amp;diff=4073</id>
		<title>The Portal Administrator View</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=The_Portal_Administrator_View&amp;diff=4073"/>
		<updated>2025-11-05T09:18:59Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Henrik.Moller: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;An administrator can do everything a user can do and more. In addition to what a normal user can do, an administrator can create and modify users and stop tasks for any task. &lt;br /&gt;
These new functions will be explained in the next three chapters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We will start with the &#039;&#039;Search&#039;&#039; tab where two more buttons are visible. Next is the &#039;&#039;Vehicles&#039;&#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
Lastly is the &#039;&#039;Administration&#039;&#039; tab with five sub tabs consisting of: the &#039;&#039;Connect&#039;&#039; tab, the &#039;&#039;Archives&#039;&#039; tab the&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;GDS/SDDB files&#039;&#039; tab, the &#039;&#039;Resource Groups&#039;&#039; tab and the &#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==The Tasks Tab==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Illustration 32a.png|thumb|Stopping Running Task]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Illustration 32b.png|thumb|Force Stop Task]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition to the functionality for an ordinary user, an administrator the administrator can search and view any user&#039;s task. Also, it has one more button present. An administrator can send a &#039;&#039;Force Stop&#039;&#039; command to any WCU.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Figure &amp;quot;Stopping Running Task&amp;quot; shows the &amp;quot;Stop assigment&amp;quot; button. This button is the same as for the ordinary user and is used to stop a running task. When a running task is stopped, it changes state to &amp;quot;Stop pending&amp;quot;. This means that the portal is waiting for a stop message from the WCU before the state is changed to &amp;quot;Stopped&amp;quot; in the portal view. The administrator view&#039;s &amp;quot;Force Stop Task&amp;quot; button, which can be seen in Figure &amp;quot;Force Stop Task&amp;quot;, forces a &amp;quot;Stop pending&amp;quot; task into &amp;quot;Stopped&amp;quot; state without waiting for the stop signal from the WCU. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a portal of version 2.60 and forward, it is also possible for an administrator to remove all resultfiles for a selected task using the corresponding context menu option. When doing so, a confirmation dialog pops up to ensure that it is in fact the intended choice. Note that this option is disabled if multiple tasks are selected or if the selected task does not have any result files attached.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==The Vehicles Tab==&lt;br /&gt;
An administrator can do quite a lot of things in this view, an illustration of which is presented in Figure &amp;quot;The Administrator&#039;s Vehicles Tab&amp;quot;. The table header along with the buttons “Edit Description” and “Get Log Files” are explained in the page for &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Vehicles]]&#039;&#039;&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the bottom you have a set of buttons to aid in handling the WCUs. To add a new WCU to the portal, the “New” buttons opens up a dialog for that. The “Get Log Files” button fetches log files for the selected WCU from the portal.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Vehicles panel adm buttons Screenshot from 2023-06-28 15-06-17.png|left|thumb|800x800px|The Administrator&#039;s Vehicles Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The New WCU Dialog===&lt;br /&gt;
There are two ways that a WCU can enter the portal. The first is if you click the “New WCU” button and the second is the first time a WCU connects to the portal it registers itself. Ideally you will never have to add a WCU to the portal but just as a safety step you have the opportunity to add it yourself. When clicking the “New WCU” button the dialog presented in in Figure &amp;quot;The Add New WCU Dialog&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Illustration34.png|frame|left|The Add New WCU Dialog]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You must enter the ID of the WCU as this is a unique identifier and you will be notified if the ID is already present on the portal. The description is optional but may be handy to remember which WCU it is.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The Edit WCU Dialog===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To edit a WCU simply mark it in the table and press the button called &amp;quot;Edit WCU&amp;quot;. This results in a dialog where the fields differ depending on editability. For one selected WCU these are the comment, name, whether it is active or not, the labels for the WCU or if it requires approved assignments. However, if the WCU has tasks which have status pending, running, warning or error (or corresponding partial statuses), the active option is disabled. This is also true if the WCU is connected to a vehicle or if it is included in a resource group. By checking &amp;quot;Require approved assignments&amp;quot; you can only add assignments that have been reviewed and then approved by the reviewers. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Edit-wcu-2.87.png|alt=Edit a WCU|thumb|Edit a WCU Dialog]]&lt;br /&gt;
If the selected WCU is a resource group the dialog will appear as presented in Figure &amp;quot;Edit WCU Dialog&amp;quot;. The difference here is the &amp;quot;Apply label to resource group&#039;s WCUs&amp;quot;checkbox. When this option is selected the labels selected in the &amp;quot;Manage labels&amp;quot;-selector are also added to the WCUs included in the resource group. It is, though, not possible to remove labels from the resource group&#039;s WCUs using this checkbox. To do so use instead the context menu options for label management. [[File:Edit wcu.png|thumb|Edit a Resource Group WCU Dialog|left]]It is also possible to edit multiple WCUs simultaneously. If several WCUs are selected the dialog presented in Figure &amp;quot;Edit Multiple WCUs&amp;quot; appear. This is only possible for the fields &amp;quot;Comment&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Active&amp;quot; and these are enabled using the corresponding checkbox to the right. If one of the selected WCUs fulfill the conditions presented above for the disablement of the Active-option, it will not be possible to select the corresponding checkbox. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Edit wcu multiple.png|thumb|Edit Multiple WCUs|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Edit the WCU Configuration===&lt;br /&gt;
You can edit the configuration of the WCU from the portal. Simply click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit Configuration&#039;&#039;&#039; to open up a Tab in Figures &amp;quot;Edit Configuration: Modules&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Edit Configuration: Connection&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Edit Configuration: WCU&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Edit Configuration: Power Management&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Edit Configuration: Upload&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Edit Configuration: IO&amp;quot;, and &amp;quot;Edit Configuration: Extra bundles&amp;quot;. The WCU configuration window is divided into five tabs where each tab is described below.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=&amp;quot;150&amp;quot; mode=&amp;quot;nolines&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:ModulesTab.png|Edit Configuration: Modules.&lt;br /&gt;
File:ConnectionTab.png|Edit Configuration: Connection.&lt;br /&gt;
File:WCUTab.png|Edit Configuration: WCU.&lt;br /&gt;
File:PowerManagementTab.png|Edit configuration: Power Management&lt;br /&gt;
File:UploadTab.png|Edit Configuration: Upload.&lt;br /&gt;
File:IOTab.png|Edit configuration: IO&lt;br /&gt;
File:ExtraBundlesTab.png|Edit Configuration: Extra bundles.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Modules====&lt;br /&gt;
The set of checkboxes for the different modules that are present are at the top. Check or uncheck these to tell the WCU if they are present or not. Disabling modules will speed up the boot process of the WCU (but will make the corresponding functionality unavailable).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To edit &amp;quot;Car type&amp;quot;, click on the field where the car type is displayed to open the &amp;quot;Edit car&amp;quot; dialog. This dialog is described in section [[The_Portal_Administrator_View#The_Edit_Car_Dialog]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The last three checkboxes, &amp;quot;Run IDC at boot&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Run IDC at ignition off&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Enable VIN reader&amp;quot; are pretty much self-explanatory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Connection====&lt;br /&gt;
This tab can be seen in Figure &amp;quot;Edit Configuration: Connection&amp;quot;  and the tab content for the WLAN part is described [[WCU as WiFi Access Point|here.]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on site,i.e. is enabled, and if the WCU software is at least 2.90.0, an option of configuring a [https://www.wireguard.com/ WireGuard] VPN is available and described here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Remote Login =====&lt;br /&gt;
Determines if it is possible to connect to the WCU remotely - possibly configured with an active time limit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on the portal setup, the following modes are possible:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* None - not possible to specify a time limit.&lt;br /&gt;
* Optional - the user may specify a time limit.&lt;br /&gt;
* Required - the user must specify a time limit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If specified, the remote logon configuration will be automatically disabled after the limit has expired. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a time limit is active, the following is possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To enable remote login - select &amp;quot;Enable&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* To enabletime limit - select &amp;quot;Time Limited&amp;quot; and enter a value for hours.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Remote login add.png|thumb|Time limited remote login - Add]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a time limit is active, the following is possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To disable remote login - deselect &amp;quot;Enable&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* To disable time limit - deselect &amp;quot;Time Limited&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* To change the time limit - select &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot; and enter a new value for hours.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Remote login edit.png|thumb|Time limited remote login - Edit]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====WCU====&lt;br /&gt;
This tab can be seen in Figure &amp;quot;Edit Configuration: WCU&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;Unit ID&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The automatically generated unique WCU identifier. The ID is immutable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;Platform type&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The WCU platform type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;Platform subtype&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The WCU platform subtype.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;WCU software version&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
This is the currently installed WCU software version.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;Preferred WCU software&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
This is the new preferred WCU software version to be installed. When updating to a new version, the configuration dialog will update itself immediately to reflect what is available in the new version, hence accordingly also when downgrading. This means that new settings regarding the WCU&#039;s modules will also be upgraded which makes it possible to edit the modules according to the new version. In addition, when creating new tasks, validation will be carried out to the new version and hence you will not have to wait for the WCU to be updated to the new version to use new features.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;Perform reset on update&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Removes all data on the WCU when installing a new WCU software.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;MX4 firmware version&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The currently installed MX4 firmware version.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;Preferred MX4 firmware&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The new preferred MX4 firmware.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.40 of the WCU software, all WCUs report its platform type. The platform type determines, among other things, the number of available CAN buses in the IO tab. (see [[I/O configurations]]) Since a resource group is a collection of WCUs it has no platform type of its own to report. From version 2.41 of the portal the user has the option to set a fictive platform type for a resource group. This is also a prerequisite to also set the [[I/O configurations]] for a resource group. The platform type (and possibly subtype) is set in the WCU tab. If the resource group has members with other platform type(s) than the type that is about to be set, the user will get a warning.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the platform type of the resource group differs from the platform type of its members the I/O tab will be disabled. This is also the case when the platform type of the resource group and one member is the same but another member has another platform type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.42 it is possible to update the WCU root password. To update the password, write the new password in &amp;quot;Set root password&amp;quot; and save the configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;WCU Local Scheduling Time Zone&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a WCU of version 2.53 or higher it is possible to configure a local time zone for the WCU using the option &amp;quot;Local scheduling time zone&amp;quot; presented in Figure &amp;quot;Edit Configuration: WCU&amp;quot;. This field consist of a drop down menu displaying the selectable time zones, which are as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
* Universal&lt;br /&gt;
* Africa/Cairo&lt;br /&gt;
* America/Anchorage&lt;br /&gt;
* America/Caracas&lt;br /&gt;
* America/Chicago&lt;br /&gt;
* America/Denver&lt;br /&gt;
* America/Los_Angeles&lt;br /&gt;
* America/New_York&lt;br /&gt;
* America/Sao_Paulo&lt;br /&gt;
* Asia/Dhaka&lt;br /&gt;
* Asia/Dubai&lt;br /&gt;
* Asia/Hong_Kong&lt;br /&gt;
* Asia/Karachi&lt;br /&gt;
* Asia/Tokyo&lt;br /&gt;
* Australia/Adelaide&lt;br /&gt;
* Australia/Brisbane&lt;br /&gt;
* Australia/Darwin&lt;br /&gt;
* Australia/Sydney&lt;br /&gt;
* Europe/London&lt;br /&gt;
* Europe/Moscow&lt;br /&gt;
* Europe/Paris&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The zone defined here will be enforced selecting &amp;quot;WCU local time&amp;quot; when scheduling a task, see description [[Creating a Task#CAN-recorder#Scheduling|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;Blink Controller&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
For WCUs of version later than or equal to 2.54 it is possible to configure the blink controller for the WCU diods, which can be set to blink in different patterns to represent different WCU states. Selecting &amp;quot;Legacy&amp;quot; in the corresponding drop down menu will result in the WCU controlling the diods and the &amp;quot;DioIPD&amp;quot;-option means that the DioIPD will controll them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;Enable NTP Server&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enable or disable the NTP server by the use of a checkbox named thereafter for WCUs of version 2.60 or later. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;WCU Certificate&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wcu certficate three files.png|thumb|Files for Certificate Update]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the WCU is version 2.52 or later you have an opportunity to update the WCU&#039;s certificate and related files. If the conditions mentioned are met you will see a checkbox saying &amp;quot;Update certificate related files&amp;quot;, see Figure &amp;quot;Files for Certificate Update&amp;quot;. When checking the checkbox, an additional three fields are revealed. They are:&lt;br /&gt;
* Certificate file, choose a certificate file to upload which is in PEM format.&lt;br /&gt;
* Private key file, choose a private key to upload in PEM format as well.&lt;br /&gt;
* Password file, choose a file with the password to the private key. The file should be plain text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You must supply all three files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to see what certificate is installed on the WCU at any time, there is text field called &amp;quot;Current fingerprint&amp;quot;. If you have recently updated a WCUs certificate, you can by hovering over the field also see if the WCU is using the latest certificate. If this the case a message saying &amp;quot;Using latest certificate&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Renew WCU Certificate&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to renew a WCU&#039;s certificate by selecting the checkbox &amp;quot;Renew certificate&amp;quot;. Doing so will automatically issue a new certificate when the configuration is saved. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RenewCertificate.png|thumb|Renew Certificate]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Enable PTP ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ptp-setting-wcu.png|alt=PTP settings in the WCU configuration|thumb|PTP settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.81.0 of the WCU software there support for starting a PTP daemon on the WCU in order to synchronize time between units connected to the WCU. The protocol is designed to attain a higher accuracy than when using NTP. When you enable the setting you must also select to which interface on the WCU the daemon should listen on. You can see what it looks like in the illustration on the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Power Management====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Periodic wake up time.png|thumb|frame|Perodic Wake-up]]&lt;br /&gt;
This tab can be seen in Figure &amp;quot;Edit Configuration: Power Management&amp;quot; and the tab content is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Power mode” has two settings: &amp;quot;Sleep&amp;quot;, Deep sleep&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Cut-off&amp;quot;. In cut-off mode, the WCU is not woken up at regular intervals to report battery voltage, GPS position etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In sleep mode, some more settings are visible which also can be seen in Figure &amp;quot;Edit Configuration: Power Management&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
You can select the WCU to remain unpowered by selecting &amp;quot;External cut-off&amp;quot;, only available for the COMMITTO platform. In addition, you may enable the WCU&#039;s wake-up functionality. This function is simply made up of a cycle time called “Periodic wake-up time” and the corresponding “Periodic run-time”. The “Periodic run-time” determines how long time the WCU should be awake before going back to sleep. The “Periodic wake-up time” indicates the time for each new wake-up cycle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.43 it is also possible to set power mode to &amp;quot;deep sleep&amp;quot; for WCUs running on platform MX4 T20/T30 and MX4 V61. The configuration is the same as for mode &amp;quot;sleep&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Example: &#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
A periodic run-time of 600 seconds means that the WCU will be alive for 600 seconds (10 minutes). A periodic wake-up time of 3600 seconds means that the WCU will start a new run-time (600 seconds in this case) every new hour. (3600 seconds = 60 min). The sleep time in each cycle is, for the general case, the wake-up time minus the run-time and in this example 3600 minus 600 = 3000 seconds (50 min).&lt;br /&gt;
This example is illustrated in Figure &amp;quot;Perodic Wake-up&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.88.0 it is possible wake on a specific CAN frame ID. The settings are the same is for the canrecorder task. There it is possible to select one specific frame or several by separating them by “,”. It is also possible to select a range between frames by using “-”. The value can either be decimal or hexadecimal. A example of a filter: “1, 0x12-0xFF”&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--You can select the MCD-Hub to remain unpowered by selecting &amp;quot;MCD-hub cut-off&amp;quot;. In addition, you may enable the WCUs wake-up functionality. This function is simply made up of a cycle time called “Periodic wake-up time” and the corresponding “Periodic run-time” which indicates for how long I should be awake before going to sleep. The committo platform has some limits on the two settings and those are: minimum time to set between wake-ups is 10 minutes and the maximum time is 12 hours.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====WMU&#039;s Power Management====&lt;br /&gt;
If your Portal has [[WMU | WMU&#039;s]] enabled and you have added WMU&#039;s to the WCU Configuration in the [[I/O_configurations#Add_WMU(s) | I/O Configurations tab]], then the Power Management controls &amp;quot;Power Mode&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Wake on CAN&amp;quot; are present for each WMU with a tab of their own. These tabs are found at the top of the dialog window next to the WCU&#039;s Power Management tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Upload====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;upload tab wcu configuration&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This tab can be seen in Figure &amp;quot;Edit Configuration: Upload&amp;quot; and the tab content is described in the table below.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot; | Mobile upload limit&lt;br /&gt;
| Defines the maximum data size that should be transferred via the mobile network. If the data size is larger than that the WCU will wait until a connection to a local network can be established. The size is in Mbytes.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot; | Post run grace timeout&lt;br /&gt;
| The number of seconds to wait before communicating with the portal, if the ignition is turned off.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot; | Upload timeout&lt;br /&gt;
| The maximum number of seconds the WCU should upload data before stopping.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot; | Erase error code&lt;br /&gt;
| If turned on the error codes in the vehicle will be reset.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot; | Upload data at boot&lt;br /&gt;
| Uploads data when the WCU boots up.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot; | Upload data at ignition off&lt;br /&gt;
| Uploads data when the ignition of the vehicle is turned off.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Upload periodically&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|Uploads data every 10 minutes.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====IO====&lt;br /&gt;
Version &amp;gt;= 2.41 of the portal has a new tab named I/O. You can read more about in [[I/O_configurations]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Extra bundles====&lt;br /&gt;
[[Extra bundles|For more information about Extra bundles, click here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From portal version 2.47 and if the WCU is running 2.47 (or is about to be upgraded to 2.47) there is a new tab &amp;quot;Extra bundles&amp;quot; in the WCU configuration window, see Figure &amp;quot;Edit Configuration: Extra bundles&amp;quot;. In the tab, it is possible to select additional software to be installed on the WCU. The installation will start as soon as the WCU fetches the updated configuraton. This tab is only enabled if the current WCU is an MX4.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The Edit Vehicle Dialog===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Illustration37.png|thumb|200px|right|Edit One Vehicle]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Illustration38.png|thumb|200px|right|Edit Several Vehicles]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To edit the information about a car, press the “Edit Vehicle” button. The dialog in Figure &amp;quot;Edit One Vehicle&amp;quot; opens up.The one entry you can not edit is the VIN entry. If you need to edit that you must instead create a new car.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order for the portal to be able to translate Diagnostic Trouble Codes into a human readable format, you must choose a diagnostic DB file to be used. It is important to select the correct one as the diagnostic trouble codes read out might be translated incorrectly or (more probable), not at all. It is also important to select the right type of vehicle using “Vehicle type”. This controls the number of CAN buses and the number of Ethernet networks, if any, in the vehicle. If the selected vehicle is connected to a WCU in a resource group, strict or not, this option is disabled. To enable it it either has to be disconnected from the WCU or the WCU must be excluded from its resource group. The “Active” check box controls whether the vehicle should show up in tables and searches in general concerning cars. A vehicle can never be removed as it has probably been involved in measurements but to recall an inactivated vehicle you must actively select to view inactivated vehicles. However, if the vehicle is connected to a WCU this option will be disabled from editing. In order to deactivate such a vehicle you need to first disconnect it from the WCU. It is possible to choose not to update history vehicles with the provided changes. This option should only used in specific cases and with a well grounded reason. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to update several vehicles at once by selecting multiple vehicles and then press the “Edit Vehicle” button. By doing this you can selectively make changes to attributes, except for the VIN and plate number, for all the selected vehicles at once. This is achieved using the extended dialog presented in Figure &amp;quot;Edit Several Vehicles&amp;quot;. The options which are to be edited for all vehicles must be selected using the corresponding checkbox. If not, the option is disabled, as for instance the &amp;quot;Comment&amp;quot;-option in the &amp;quot;Edit Several Vehicles&amp;quot;-figure.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Add Vehicle Dialog ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Add-car-dialog.png|alt=add car dialog|thumb|Add Vehicle dialog]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Save car response dialog.png|thumb|Response dialog when creating a new vehicle]]&lt;br /&gt;
Usually you do not have to create vehicles manually, they are created automatically by the WCU if they are not found. It is possible, however, to create a vehicle manually using the portal by pressing the button &amp;quot;Add Vehicle&amp;quot; in the vehicles panel. By doing so you will be presented with the dialog found on the right. Here you can set a number of attributes. Important to remember is that the field VIN is mandatory and must be unique among all vehicles registered on the portal. From version 2.57 of the portal the checkbox &amp;quot;Generate unique VIN&amp;quot; is present to the right of the input field VIN. By checking that box a unique VIN will be generated once you save the vehicle. The name consists of a prefix, which is centrally preconfigured, and a monotonically increasing integer number. After pressing save you will be presented with the following dialog (in the right below). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you have the opportunity to inspect the generated VIN and your other settings. You can either select to dismiss the dialog or go to the result which means that the newly created vehicle will be presented in the table in the vehicles panel.&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Upload a Vehicle Import File===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using &#039;&#039;Upload Vehicle Import File&#039;&#039;,&lt;br /&gt;
you can import vehicles using a [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Comma-separated_values csv file].&lt;br /&gt;
This can be used both to create&lt;br /&gt;
new vehicles&lt;br /&gt;
and optionally to update existing ones.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The header is a bit special:&lt;br /&gt;
a set of columns are treated specially,&lt;br /&gt;
and the rest are added to the resulting vehicle as labels.&lt;br /&gt;
The special column headers are listed below,&lt;br /&gt;
but are also the same fields you find in the [[#Add Vehicle Dialog|Add Vehicle dialog]].&lt;br /&gt;
These are case-insensitive&lt;br /&gt;
and the order of them does not matter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As mentioned,&lt;br /&gt;
remaining columns are interpreted as labels&lt;br /&gt;
and are added to all imported vehicles.&lt;br /&gt;
New labels are created as valued labels,&lt;br /&gt;
and are given an empty value for rows with empty data.&lt;br /&gt;
If there is data present,&lt;br /&gt;
it will be saved as the value of the label for the corresponding vehicles.&lt;br /&gt;
If the label already exists&lt;br /&gt;
but is not a valued label,&lt;br /&gt;
the column &#039;&#039;&#039;must&#039;&#039;&#039; be empty.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Special header values:&lt;br /&gt;
; VIN&lt;br /&gt;
: VIN specifying what car the row refers to. &#039;&#039;&#039;Required&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
; regNr&lt;br /&gt;
: License plate number.&lt;br /&gt;
; description&lt;br /&gt;
; project&lt;br /&gt;
; protoNumber&lt;br /&gt;
; tsu&lt;br /&gt;
; series&lt;br /&gt;
; profile&lt;br /&gt;
: Name of [[Vehicle Profiles|Vehicle Profile]]&lt;br /&gt;
; diagnostics&lt;br /&gt;
: Name of [[Vehicle Profiles#Manage Description files|Diagnostics DB]] file  &lt;br /&gt;
Full header for copying: &#039;&#039;VIN,regNr,description,project,protoNumber,tsu,series,profile,diagnostics&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Show or export SIM card ID ===&lt;br /&gt;
The SIM card ID for a single WCU can be seen when right-clicking on a WCU in the Vehicles tab and selecting &amp;quot;Show info&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SIM card ID&#039;s for one or multiple WCUs can also be exported as a csv file. Select the WCUs you are interested in (in the Vehicles tab) and press the button &amp;quot;Export SIM card info&amp;quot; located in the bottom row below the Vehicles grid. The downloaded file will contain five columns: WCU ID, WCU Name, RegNr (Plate nr), VIN and SIM Card ID. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Upload WCU file ===&lt;br /&gt;
The WCU attributes &#039;WCU Name&#039; and &#039;WCU Comment&#039; can from version 2.43 of the portal be updated for multiple WCUs via a comma separated txt/xls/xlsx file. Click the &amp;quot;Upload WCU File&amp;quot; button to open up the import file to upload dialog. Remember that this function is only for updating already existing WCUs, WCUs not existing cannot be added using this function.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The uploaded file has the following requirements:&lt;br /&gt;
* The file must have two mandatory columns with the names &#039;WCU ID&#039; and &#039;WCU Name&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* Furthermore, an optional column named &#039;Comments&#039; can be added. &lt;br /&gt;
* The columns should be in said order.&lt;br /&gt;
* The amount of columns on each row must match the amount of columns in the header. &lt;br /&gt;
* The columns should be separated by using tab or by a comma.&lt;br /&gt;
If there is a &#039;Comment&#039; column and a blank comment on a row then the old comment, if any, for the specific WCU will be kept. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To remove a comment from a WCU simply check the checkbox for erasing comments. Doing so will result in that empty comments in the uploaded file will erase current comments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Upload a file describing ECU pin codes for a vehicle ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Upload vehicle pins file Screenshot from 2023-06-28 15-22-22.png|thumb|Upload of a vehicle pin code file]]&lt;br /&gt;
ECU pin codes can be specific for a vehicle. This makes it possible to [https://wiki.alkit.se/wice284/index.php/Creating_a_Task#SWDL create an SWDL assignment] for multiple vehicles in one go. In order for this to work you must first prepare all such vehicles by uploading a file describing the different pin codes. When using the button &amp;quot;Upload Vehicles pins&amp;quot; multiple vehicles can be described in one file. The format of such a file is  row based where each row should be &#039;&#039;&#039;vin;ecu;pin&#039;&#039;&#039;. The ecu field is the hexadecimal address the ECU. When pressing the button &amp;quot;Upload Vehicles pins&amp;quot; you will be presented with the dialog found to the right.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Context-vehicle-pin-code-file.png|thumb|The context menu choice for uploading a ECU pin code file for a single vehicle.]]&lt;br /&gt;
There is also on option available with a context menu (right click a row) where a singe vehicle is targeted. The format of the file is the same except that no vin should be in the file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:Shelve and Unshelve a WCU}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Resource Groups==&lt;br /&gt;
As described above in [[Vehicles#Resource Groups]], you can define a set of resource groups in order to easily handle large groups of resources collectively. An example is if you have 100&lt;br /&gt;
WCUs in such a resource group and you would like to edit the configuration for all WCUs. Instead of having to open the configuration for each individual WCU, you simply open the configuration for the resource group, do your edits and when you press save, the configuration&lt;br /&gt;
will be saved to all WCUs in one go. Resource groups are created in the [[The Portal Administrator View#Resource group|Resource groups panel]], described further below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AddWCUtoResourceGroup.png|thumb|Adding Resources to Resource Group|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
==== Add a resource to a resource group ====&lt;br /&gt;
To add resources to a resource group you start by selecting the resources you are interested in adding to a resource group. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are satisfied with your selection, press the button “Add WCU(s) to resource group”. Pressing this button will show the dialog to the left. The group box will list the available groups. If you know the name of the resource group you can type the name and as you type the box will show names that fit what you type. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The two check boxes requires a deeper discussion. Assume you have a resource group that has been used for some time. A new WCU is registered on the portal and you would like to add that WCU to your group. A common situation is that you would like that WCU to be configured the same way as the rest of the WCUs in the resource group. This is accomplished by checking “Update WCU configuration”. If this requires an update of the WCU software it will automatically be taken care of. Also, a WCU comes pre-configured with a set of modules. Usually you will probably want to update the module configurations as well. In order to do so, it is required that you also update the WCU-configuration. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you leave the &amp;quot;Update WCU configuration&amp;quot; and/or &amp;quot;Update module configuration&amp;quot; unchecked, that selection of only in this instant. If you later change the resource group configuration (or module configuration), that change will be applied to all resources in the group. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ConfirmMovingResourceToResourceGroup.png|thumb|Dialog: WCU Moved to Another Resource Group|right]] &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==== Moving a resource between resource groups ====&lt;br /&gt;
In this same dialog it is also possible to move WCUs between resource groups. Just as with adding a WCU to a resource group, select the WCU(s) you wish to move and press the &amp;quot;Add WCU(s) to resource group&amp;quot; button. If a WCU already belongs to a resource group, that resource group is listed in the grid alongside the WCU. Select the desired resource group you wish to move the WCU to, in the group box and press the &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot; button. An information dialog will pop up, informing you that a WCU will move from one resource group to another. Press &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; to confirm the WCU moving to a new resource group or press &amp;quot;Cancel&amp;quot; to return to the previous dialog. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AddWCUToStrictResourceGroup.png|thumb|Adding/Moving WCU to Strict Resource Group.|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==== Requirements for moving or adding a resource to a strict resource group ====&lt;br /&gt;
When adding or moving WCUs to a strict resource group, it is required that the WCU shares the same platform type (and platform subtype, should one exist) and that a car is connected to the WCU (see [[Strict resource group|strict resource groups]]). Furthermore, updating the WCU-configuration and the module configurations are mandatory and, as such, these options are set and not able to be changed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Modules for the WCU==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot from 2021-09-10 15-34-09.png|alt=Tool configurations.|thumb|687x687px|Selecting Tool Configurations]]&lt;br /&gt;
Each WCU supports a number of modules. The modules are software components realizing specific functions, such as a measurement tool, a data source or software component. Some modules correspond to external measurement devices connected to the WCU, whereas other are built-in. This makes it possible to add new peripherals to the WCU for handling various tasks in acquiring measured data from a car. The set of currently available modules are:&lt;br /&gt;
# Area5&lt;br /&gt;
# Audio&lt;br /&gt;
# Blue piraT&lt;br /&gt;
# Canrecorder&lt;br /&gt;
# DLT&lt;br /&gt;
# DoIP&lt;br /&gt;
# ETAS&lt;br /&gt;
# Ethernet capture&lt;br /&gt;
# GPS&lt;br /&gt;
# IDC&lt;br /&gt;
# IPEmotion RT&lt;br /&gt;
# LPD&lt;br /&gt;
# M-log&lt;br /&gt;
# MCD-Hub (deprecated)&lt;br /&gt;
# MQTT&lt;br /&gt;
# Rapid Prototyping (RP)&lt;br /&gt;
# Signal Reader&lt;br /&gt;
# Smart Eye&lt;br /&gt;
# Soft-Hub&lt;br /&gt;
# State of Health (SoH)&lt;br /&gt;
# Software Download (SWDL)&lt;br /&gt;
# Uptime&lt;br /&gt;
# Video&lt;br /&gt;
# Vinreader&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To deal with each module&#039;s configuration a new view is presented below. To open this view, press the button “Modules” as shown in Figure &amp;quot;The Administrator&#039;s Vehicles Tab&amp;quot; in [[#The Vehicles Tab]].&lt;br /&gt;
In Figure &amp;quot;Selecting Tool Configurations&amp;quot; there are a set of tools present where each type is grouped on the left side using a stack panel. Show the Signal Reader settings by selecting the Signal Reader stack and select the Canrecorder stack to see the canrecorder settings and so forth.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each tool has its own entry in each of the stacks. In Figure &amp;quot;Handling Tool Configurations&amp;quot; there is only one MCD-Hub present and it is “0”. Each tool is recognized with a tool ID which is set by the WCU. This ID is usually not descriptive and therefore you have the possibility to set a name of your likings. Change the name by pressing the button “Edit name”. You can also add a description to the tool that shows up as a “tool tip” when hovering over the name of the selected tool. Analogously, change the description by pressing the button “Edit description”. To reload the set of available tools  press the “Reload” button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Below each tool configuration there messages are presented to indicate the module status. The different types of which are presented in Figure &amp;quot;Module Status Indicators&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=&amp;quot;200&amp;quot; mode=&amp;quot;nolines&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Modules no settings changed.png|Module Status Indicators&lt;br /&gt;
File:Modules settings not saved.png&lt;br /&gt;
File:Modules settings saved.png&lt;br /&gt;
File:Modules tool upgrade pending.png&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a module is selected, or reloaded, it will say &amp;quot;No settings saved&amp;quot;. In this mode the save-button is disabled and it will not be enabled until one of the settings is edited. Then the message &amp;quot;Settings not saved&amp;quot; appears until the save button is pressed. When the configuration is successfully saved, the status is updated to &amp;quot;Settings saved&amp;quot; and the Save-button is once again disabled. In addition, if there is a pending upgrade of the tool, this also will be indicated below the configuration panel.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot from 2021-04-09 10-54-55.png|thumb|Module status with information on when it was changed and by whom]]&lt;br /&gt;
In addition to the module status indicator above, a date and user will show when the configuration was changed and by whom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configure the Arcos Module ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ArcosNewModule.png|alt=Arcos-module|thumb|Arcos-module]]&lt;br /&gt;
As of version 2.71 of the portal, Arcos tasks can be created and these are the configurations variables that can be configured:&lt;br /&gt;
* Username&lt;br /&gt;
* Password&lt;br /&gt;
* Frontend number&lt;br /&gt;
*Current firmware&lt;br /&gt;
*Desired firmware&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Debug level]]&lt;br /&gt;
When configuring the module on a resource group level the username and password will be set on all resources in the resource group. The frontend number however, will not be updated on all the resources but rather retain the individual settings made on each resource.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order for the &amp;quot;Current firmware&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Desired firmware&amp;quot; field to show the WCU software version needs to be 2.85.0 or later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configure the Area5 Module ===&lt;br /&gt;
As of version 2.61 of the portal, it is possible to create Area5 tasks. The Area5 tool only has one configuration, the [[debug level]], which determines the level of logging during the execution of the Area5 tasks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configure the Audio Module ===&lt;br /&gt;
The audio module can be configured both regarding &#039;&#039;&#039;recording&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;monitoring&#039;&#039;&#039;. The recording settings refer to what is recorded on the WCU to disc to be uploaded, whereas the monitoring settings refer to the parameters used for monitoring live audio.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The available recording settings are:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Device&#039;&#039;&#039;, can be set to internal or USB, where default is internal&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Channels&#039;&#039;&#039;, can be set to either 1 (mono) or 2 (stereo), default is 2&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Sample rate&#039;&#039;&#039;, can be set to 48000, 44100, 16000 or 8000. Default is 48000. The unit is Hz.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Recording volume&#039;&#039;&#039;, can be set to a value between 0 and 100, where default is 95.&lt;br /&gt;
The available monitoring settings are:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Channels&#039;&#039;&#039;, 1 (mono) or 2 (stereo). Default is 1.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Codec&#039;&#039;&#039;, LPCM, GSM or G.711. Default is LPCM (Linear PCM 16 bits per sample, 16 kHz).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Destination IP address&#039;&#039;&#039;. This is the address to where the audio is sent for live monitoring.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable monitoring&#039;&#039;&#039;. In order to monitor audio live for an audio task, the module must be enabled for monitoring. If the task is enabled for monitoring but the module is not, no audio can be monitored live. Default is disabled.&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to have four audio sources simultaneously. To add a new source, simply press the button &amp;quot;Add audio source&amp;quot; and the corresponding settings will appear in a new tab. If there already is an audio source with device set to internal, the new device will have default device USB. However, if there is no previous device set to internal, this will be the default option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configure the Blue piraT Module ===&lt;br /&gt;
As of version 2.44 of the portal it is possible to create blue piraT tasks. The blue piraT tool only has one configuration, the [[debug level]], which determines the level of logging during the execution of the blue piraT tasks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configure the Canrecorder Module ===&lt;br /&gt;
The configurable settings for the Canrecorder module can be seen in Figure &amp;quot;Settings for the Canrecorder module&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modules Canrecorder.png|thumb|left|250px|Settings for the Canrecorder module]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the aforementioned figure, it is clear that this panel can be used to edit the speed on both the high- and low-speed CAN-buses. It is also possible to set the date for which the update is valid, the canrecorder version and the debug level.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configure the DLT Module ===&lt;br /&gt;
For WCUs with software version earlier than 2.72.0 the DLT module have two DLT-specific settings, one for the daemon address and one for the daemon port. Have a look [[DLT Module|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For WCUs with software version 2.72.0 or later, the daemon addresses and ports (several daemons are supported from this version) are instead specified when creating a [[Creating a Task#Diagnostic Log and Trace (DLT)|Diagnostic Log and Trace (DLT) task]]. The only thing specified in the module is the debug level - the level of logging from the WCU regarding its handling of this task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configure the DoIP Module ===&lt;br /&gt;
In figure &amp;quot;Settings for the DoIP module&amp;quot; the configuration for the DoIP module is presented.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Proxy address:&#039;&#039;&#039; The proxy address for the DoIP module.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Proxy port:&#039;&#039;&#039; The proxy port.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ID:&#039;&#039;&#039; The ID of the DoIP module.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Active session:&#039;&#039;&#039; Checkbox to let the DoIP module start announcing an ongoing synchronous diagnostic session. This is typically done by setting a LED on the WCU connected to the vehicle, signaling that a synchronous diagnostic session is ongoing. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Proxy address should usually be set to the localhost IP address 127.0.0.1 for technical reasons (it will be tunneled) and the proxy port number should usually be 6757. The ID is a textual string that identifies a particular user group that will gain access to the WCUs by configuring the client interface system with the same identifier. (This configuration is done at doipc install time.) All WCUs configured with the same ID will be reachable through the same client system interface. For more information see [[Remote Diagnostics over IP (DoIP)|Remote Diagnostics over IP (DoIP)]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modules DoIP.png|thumb|left|250px|Settings for the DoIP module]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configure the ETAS Module ===&lt;br /&gt;
In Figure &amp;quot;Settings for the ETAS module&amp;quot; the configuration panel for the ETAS module is presented. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modules ETAS.png|thumb|left|250px|Settings for the ETAS module]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This panel can be used to change the username and password as well as the debug level.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configure the Ethernet capture module ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot from 2021-04-01 09-34-02.png|thumb|Settings for the Ethernet capture module]]&lt;br /&gt;
The only available setting here is debug level.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configure the File fetcher module ===&lt;br /&gt;
The only available setting here is [[debug level]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configure the GPS Module===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot from 2021-04-01 09-36-42.png|thumb|Settings for the GPS module]]&lt;br /&gt;
There are four settings involved:&lt;br /&gt;
# Enable GPS. Sets whether the GPS should be enabled or not. If you disable the GPS all the other settings will also be disabled.&lt;br /&gt;
# GPS sampling interval. Sets the position sampling interval in seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
# GPS monitor enabled. If this setting is enabled the WCU will continuously send its GPS position to the portal enabling real-time monitoring of the whereabouts of the WCU.&lt;br /&gt;
# GPS monitor interval. Set how often the position will be updated. The interval is in seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configure the IDC Module===&lt;br /&gt;
The IDC module can be configured with which CAN bus to communicate with the vehicle. You can actually even choose both where it will first try the Ethernet network (ETH), if it exists, and the CAN bus. If the car type in question does not have an Ethernet network, only the CAN option will appear.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot from 2021-10-19 10-17-38.png|none|thumb|Settings for the IDC module]]&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.68.0 another option also exists where the file output format can be set.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with version 2.94.0, a new field called &#039;&#039;Tester Address&#039;&#039; has been introduced. This field offers three options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;External Diagnostics Test Equipment&#039;&#039;&#039; with a value of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;0x0E80&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;External Prolonged Data Collection Equipment&#039;&#039;&#039; with a value of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;0x0F80&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Other&#039;&#039;&#039;, which allows users to enter a custom value&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The standard range for custom values is between &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;0x0E80&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;0x0FFF&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, but users may also enter a value outside this range if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configure the IPEmotion RT Module===&lt;br /&gt;
The IPEmotion RT module can be configured with SFTP port, username and password.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configure the LPD Module===&lt;br /&gt;
The LPD module can be configured with a list of usernames. Each &amp;quot;Username&amp;quot; field represents one username in that list. Use the button next to the field to add another username.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configure the M-log Module===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot from 2022-04-21 16-11-28.png|alt=Settings for the M-log module|left|thumb|250x250px|Settings for the M-log module]]&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.75.0 of the M-log module there are two more fields present. They are &amp;quot;Current firmware&amp;quot; which is the last known firmware for the M-log logger. &amp;quot;Desired firmware&amp;quot; consists of a drop-down list a out-of-band firmware files present on the portal. Select one the files and the WCU will try to apply the firmware upgrade to the M-log as soon as possible.&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configure the MCD-Hub Module===&lt;br /&gt;
The MCD-Hub module is deprecated and should not be used anymore. The configuration for the MCD-Hub has only two settings. The first is the MCD-Hubs IP address and the second is is “MCD-Hub firmware version” which shows the current version used by the hub. The other two configuration settings  are the preferred firmware version and the second is “Last configuration update date” which states when the MCD-Hubs current configuration was brought into action.&lt;br /&gt;
When you are done with your configuration you save it by pressing the “Save” button. If you for any reason need to reload the configuration, press the “Reload” button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configure the MQTT Module===&lt;br /&gt;
The available settings for the MQTT Module is presented in Figure &amp;quot;Settings for the MQTT module&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modules MQTT.png|thumb|left|250px|Settings for the MQTT module]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This panel can be used to define an alternative host for the MQTT broker. Default is, as displayed in the illustration, localhost. Here you can also change the debug level for the module.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configure the RP Module===&lt;br /&gt;
For this module it is only possible to configure modify the debug level, see Figure &amp;quot;Settings for the RP module&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Illustration44.png|thumb|left|250px|Settings for the RP module]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
More information on how to use the RP module is found in the [[WICE RP Manual]] and the [[WICE RP How-To]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configure the Signal Reader Module===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Signal-reader-module-2.88.png|alt=Settings for the Signal Reader module|thumb|318x318px|Settings for the Signal Reader module]]&lt;br /&gt;
As of version 2.33 of the WCU software it is possible to monitor signals in real time. For this to happen you must enable the feature by checking the box “Enable monitor” illustrated in Figure &amp;quot;Settings for the Signal Reader module&amp;quot;. The monitoring can either be set as asynchronous or synchronous. In the former case, there is a regular signal communication with the portal and in the latter case with a specified destination port. For the synchronous case it is also possible to specify which transport protocol to use: TCP or UDP. The monitoring rate for both cases is set using the &amp;quot;Interval&amp;quot; field, where the default is once per second.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also here it is possible to define the debug level. Further, the module settings include selecting whether or not the MDF files are to be written upon recorder stop and the version of the generated MDF file. In the sampling section there are two main choices; whether or not to record samples on change and enabling/disabling of piecewise linear approximation (PLA). If samples are to be recorded on change, it is possible to also choose to include one sample before the change. With the choice of PLA comes the option of defining the error percentage for the signal range and the maximum segment length in number of samples.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thereafter you can select whether to aggregate ReadDataByIdentifier (service 22) diagnostic requests and which channel that should be used as the default diagnostics channel. Default interface can be CAN or DoIP and will affect the assignment that has the interface &amp;quot;Default Channel&amp;quot; selected and also the DREC. It is also possible to enter appropriate values for the diagnostics timeout. The timeout values determine how long time to wait for diagnostic responses before assuming that there are none. Typically, the timeout for sequence file diagnostics is set to a higher value due to the fact that it doesn&#039;t negatively impact the update frequency of active (diagnostics) signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.88.0 it is possible to select the MDF4 format when logging frames.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with version 2.94.0, a new field called &#039;&#039;Tester Address&#039;&#039; has been introduced. This field offers three options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;External Diagnostics Test Equipment&#039;&#039;&#039; with a value of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;0x0E80&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;External Prolonged Data Collection Equipment&#039;&#039;&#039; with a value of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;0x0F80&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Other&#039;&#039;&#039;, which allows users to enter a custom value&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The standard range for custom values is between &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;0x0E80&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;0x0FFF&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, but users may also enter a value outside this range if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configure the SmartEye Module===&lt;br /&gt;
The configuration for this module is identical to that of the RP module, depicted in Figure &amp;quot;Settings for the RP module&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configure the Soft-Hub===&lt;br /&gt;
As for the RP and Smarteye module, its only editable parameter is the debug level using a panel as displayed in Figure &amp;quot;Settings for the RP module&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configure the State of Health Module===&lt;br /&gt;
The state of health module has the same settings as the IDC module above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configure the Software Download Module===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The SWDL module has the same settings as the IDC module above apart from one difference highlighted in red in Figure &amp;quot;Settings for the Software Download Module&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modules SWDL.png|thumb|left|250px|Settings for the Software Download Module]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For WCUs of version 2.53 and forward it is possible to allow updates to be performed without manual interaction by checking the high-lighted checkbox. If this option is chosen, the updates will instead be performed as soon as possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configure the Uptime Module===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This module is used to report how much and how long the WCU is running and its configuration is set using the panel displayed in Figure &amp;quot;Settings for the Uptime Module&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Illustration43.png|thumb|left|250px|Settings for the Uptime Module]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First of all you can enable/disable the functionality all together with the “Enabled” checkbox. Next is how often the up-time should be logged in seconds. The second check box, “Monitor enabled” is used when you would like the module to report its up-time in real-time and the interval for that, also in seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configure the Video Module ===&lt;br /&gt;
A description of how to configure the video module can be found here. An explanation of the module in more general terms is found in the [[WICE video]] section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The video module can be configured both regarding the recording and the monitoring. The recording parameters refers to what is recorded on the WCU to disc to be uploaded, whereas the monitoring parameters refer to the live video that is streamed from the WCU.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The available &#039;&#039;&#039;recording&#039;&#039;&#039; settings are:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Width&#039;&#039;&#039;, which is the width in pixels of the recorded video.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Height&#039;&#039;&#039;, which is the height in pixels of the recorded video.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Frame rate&#039;&#039;&#039;, which is the number of video frames per second to be recorded.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Codec&#039;&#039;&#039;, which is the video codec used when recording video clips to disc. Avaliable codecs are JPEG and VP8. (Note that the video that is uploaded to the portal is typically transcoded to MPEG-4 format, and codec only refers to the recording phase in the WCU.)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Clip size&#039;&#039;&#039;, which is the size in seconds or bytes of clips recorded on the WCU. The clips are subsequently concatenated on the Portal, if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Clip unit&#039;&#039;&#039;, which is the unit for the clip size setting (bytes or seconds).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The available &#039;&#039;&#039;monitoring&#039;&#039;&#039; settings are:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable monitoring&#039;&#039;&#039;, which enables or disables monitoring of video.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Width&#039;&#039;&#039;, which is the width in pixels of the monitored video.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Height&#039;&#039;&#039;, which is the height in pixels of the monitored video.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Frame rate&#039;&#039;&#039;, which is the number of video frames per second to be recorded.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Codec&#039;&#039;&#039;, which is the video codec used when streaming monitored video. Avaliable codecs are JPEG and VP8.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Destination IP address&#039;&#039;&#039;, which is the IP address to which monitored video is transmitted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is also a setting for rotating the video, to be used if the camera is installed upside-down or at a 45 degree angle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configure the Vinreader Module ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SettingForTheVinReaderModule.png|alt=Settings for the Vinreader module|thumb|250x250px|Settings for the Vinreader module]]&lt;br /&gt;
The method of reading a vehicle&#039;s VIN (Vehicle Identification Number) can be set to &#039;&#039;&#039;SPA29&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;OBD2&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;SPA11, BP, TEA2+, UDS, DoIP&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;, SOVD&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;FIXED&#039;&#039;&#039;. The preferred setting for this is OBD2, whereby a standardized OBD-II diagnostic service is used to read out the VIN. SPA29 and SPA11 refers to using CAN diagnostic requests using either 29 bit or 11 bit SPA addressing respectively. The CAN channel (on the WCU) is selected in &#039;Default CAN channel&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the setting FIXED is used, the VIN will not be read out from the vehicle using a diagnostic service, but rather a preset value entered in the item named &#039;Fixed VIN&#039; is used. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot from 2022-04-22 09-09-21.png|alt=Vehicle ID method type|thumb|Vehicle ID method type]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot from 2022-04-22 09-55-55.png|alt=No identifying label selected|thumb|No identifying label selected]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Skärmavbild 2019-12-18 kl. 15.17.58.png|thumb|Audio module settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;Save VIN&#039; is a checkbox for save vin. As default the box is checked which means that it will save the VIN number if the WCU can successfully read it. If the &#039;Save VIN&#039; is unchecked then the WCU will try to read the VIN number every time it boots.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are currently two ways of identifying a vehicle, either by reading the VIN or the chassis number. The selection is shown in Illustration &#039;Vehicle ID method type&#039; to the right. When using &#039;Chassis NO&#039; as identification type you must select which valued label to use for this mechanism. If no such label has been selected, you will see the the text &#039;No label selected in backend&#039; to the right of the selected type, see Illustration &#039;No identifying label selected&#039; on the right. To select which label to use, head over to the [[Labels#Administer labels|label administration tab]] to make the selection. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with version 2.94.0, a new field called &#039;&#039;Tester Address&#039;&#039; has been introduced. This field offers three options: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;External Diagnostics Test Equipment&#039;&#039;&#039; with a value of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;0x0E80&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;External Prolonged Data Collection Equipment&#039;&#039;&#039; with a value of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;0x0F80&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Other&#039;&#039;&#039;, which allows users to enter a custom value&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The standard range for custom values is between &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;0x0E80&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;0x0FFF&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, but users may also enter a value outside this range if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; For the &#039;&#039;Tester Address&#039;&#039; field to appear in this module, the vehicle&#039;s VIN must be set to &#039;&#039;&#039;SPA29&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==The Administration Tab==&lt;br /&gt;
This tab is a collection of the administrative tasks available in the portal. These are “Connect car to WCU”, “Archives”, “GDS/SDDB file”, “Resource Groups”, “Users”, &amp;quot;Labels&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;WCU Status&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Key Figures&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The Connect Car to WCU Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To archive which vehicle a specific WCU was in at the time a task was run can be done by connecting a vehicle to a WCU in this tab. This is usually done automatically but in some situations it is necessary to do this manually&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The area is divided into two tables, one for searching WCUs, the left one, and one for searching vehicles, the right one. When you start typing the name of the WCU you are looking for in the upper left corner just above the table, matching WCUs appear in the left table. To find the vehicle you are looking for, you do the same in the right table but here you have the option of using either the VIN or plate number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To connect a WCU with a vehicle you drag the WCU you would like to connect onto the vehicle in the right table. When you drop it onto a car a small icon will show signifying that the WCU and vehicle are connected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.42 it is also possible to select a WCU and a Car and then click on the new &amp;quot;Connect&amp;quot; button located between the two grids.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To disconnect a WCU and car you simply press the icon for wither of the WCU or car.&lt;br /&gt;
See Figure &amp;quot;Connect Cars to WCU&amp;quot; for an example.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Illustration 45.png|thumb|frame|left|600px|Connect Cars to WCU]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The connection is a sort of instantaneous carbon copy of the situation at the time that a task was created. If you later change the connection, already running/run tasks will not be affected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The Resource Groups Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
This tab is used to administer some parts of the creation and destruction of resource groups and more. The panel for administering the resource groups is depicted in the Figure &amp;quot;Resource Group Tab&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Resource-groups-administration.png|left|thumb|800x800px|Resource Group Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the top is a search field to search for resource groups. Next are two tables, side by side. The left table lists the resource groups found depending on your search criteria. When a resource group is selected, the resources that are part of the resource group are shown in the right table. Next, the functionality of the buttons will be covered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Add and Remove Resource Groups====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CreateNewResourceGroup.png|thumb|Add Resource Group Dialog]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add a resource group you simply press the “New resource group” button and the following window will show. Here you can type the name for the new resource group, set the resource group as strict (see [[Strict resource group|Strict Resource Groups]]) and, if you choose to set the resource group as strict, set what platform type and platform sub type it should have. When you feel satisfied with your selections press “Create” to create the resource group. If you change your mind, press the “Cancel” button. Resource groups are global and writable and that means that names must be unique. The reason for this is that a resource group name takes on the form as both the resources car and WCU and those must be unique and therefore the resource groups must also be unique. One can, however, imagine situations where this must not be enforced but at the moment this is the case.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To remove a resource group, press the “Remove resource group” button. Be aware that no warning is given if there are resources in the group when removing it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Copy Resource group ====&lt;br /&gt;
If you have set up the configuration for a resource group it is sometimes convenient to make a copy of the resource group under a new name. To do this, select the resource group you would like to copy and press &amp;quot;Copy resource group&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Default labels ====&lt;br /&gt;
Default labels are a group of labels that will be associated with WCU or/and vehicle when a WCU joins a resource group. These labels will not affect current WCU/Vehicles in the resource group. To edit the set of labels press the “Edit default labels” button. New window will show. Read more about the edit default labels window [[Edit default labels window|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Approved Assignments ====&lt;br /&gt;
You can require that assignments must have been reviewed and approved before they can be applied to a resource group by checking the box &amp;quot;Require Approved Assignments&amp;quot;. If an assignment does not meet these criteria, the assignment will not be applied to the resource group. Read more about the assignment review process [[Review assignment process|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Fetch PINs ====&lt;br /&gt;
For portals with VCF enabled there will be a button &#039;&#039;&#039;Fetch PINs&#039;&#039;&#039; that will connect with PIE to fetch any available PINs for the resources in the group. These PINs can then be applied to the VCF configurations of the group. Read more about VCF [[Vehicle Communication Forwarder|here]] and about applying the fetched PINs [[I/O configurations#Apply uploaded PINs|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Manipulating Resources in a Resource Group====&lt;br /&gt;
In the right hand table in Figure &amp;quot;Manipulating Resources in Resource Group&amp;quot;, you see a set of resources for a resource group. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Rg.png|left|thumb|800x800px|Manipulating Resources in Resource Group]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here are both WCUs and cars part of the group. In addition to the type there is a column named “Status”. That column only applies to WCUs. The use of this column is as follows. Assume you have a resource group consisting of 50 WCUs. Further, lets make a configuration change to that resource group. Depending on where the WCUs geographically are and how they are used the WCUs will be updated at different times. How do you you know when all WCUs are up to date in the resource group? You could check them individually in the “Vehicles” panel but that is not very elegant and time saving. Instead, just watch the “Status” column for the WCUs. When a WCU is up to date with respect to the group configuration the color in the column will be green. The value is updated each 30 seconds. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The different color values are: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Red ===== &lt;br /&gt;
The WCU&#039;s configuration was edited after the resource group&#039;s configuration was saved. The WCU will never use the resource group&#039;s configuration. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Yellow ===== &lt;br /&gt;
The WCU&#039;s configuration is the same as the resource group&#039;s but the WCU has not yet updated to this configuration. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Green ===== &lt;br /&gt;
The WCU has updated to the resource group&#039;s configuration. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can remove individual resources from a group by selecting the resource and then press the “Remove resource” button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yet another button remains and it is the button “Base Group on Resource”. When you add a WCU to a resource group in the “Vehicles” panel you have the option of not updating the WCU configuration to match the one of the resource group&#039;s, see Figure &amp;quot;Dialog: WCU Moved to Another Resource Group&amp;quot; in [[#Resource Groups]]. Using this function it is possible to base the whole group on a WCU&#039;s configuration rather than the group&#039;s configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== The Vehicle Profiles Tab ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This tab is further described [[Vehicle Pofiles|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== The Alarm Tab ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This tab is further described [[Alarm|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The User Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Illustration46.png|border|800x800px]]The basic layout of the areas is just the same here as before. At the top you have a search area, in the middle is a result are and at the bottom are a set of buttons. The tab with a set of example users is in the Figure &amp;quot;User Administration Tab&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
The nine columns are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;User ID&#039;&#039;&#039;. The unique ID that the user must enter when logging in.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Name&#039;&#039;&#039;. The name of the user.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Roles&#039;&#039;&#039;. Depending on which roles the user has to, he/she have different privileges. The roles are non-overlapping, i.e. being an “Admin” does not necessarily mean that you can do everything a “User” can do.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Enabled&#039;&#039;&#039;. Tells whether the account is enabled or not.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Email Address&#039;&#039;&#039;. By registering an email address a user can receive notifications via email from a WCU when certain event occurs.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Last login date&#039;&#039;&#039;. The date when the user last logged in.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Two factor auth&#039;&#039;&#039;. Whether the two-factor authentication is turned on for a particular user.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Logged in&#039;&#039;&#039;. You can see if the user is currently logged in.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Creation Date&#039;&#039;&#039;. The date of when the user was created. Only visible on users created after December 3 2020.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the bottom there are eight buttons. They are:&lt;br /&gt;
# The “New” button brings up the “New User” dialog which adds a new user to the portal&lt;br /&gt;
# The “Edit” button brings up the “Edit User” dialog&lt;br /&gt;
# The “Change Password” button brings up a dialog to change a user&#039;s password.&lt;br /&gt;
# The “Create new secret” button. Pressing this generates a new cryptographic salt to be used when generating one-time passwords. If you do this for a user without enabling the possibility to see the secret on the next login, renders the user unable to login to the portal. No dialog is opened, simply a message saying that a new one has been generated is shown.&lt;br /&gt;
# The “Show secret” button. Shows a dialog with the cryptographic salt shown in clear text as well as the QR-code, more on this later.&lt;br /&gt;
# Edit roles and permissions&lt;br /&gt;
# The “Save headers” button. Saves the headers and their order to be used as default on later logins.&lt;br /&gt;
# Video. Start a video conversations with another user of the portal. You must have the software “Confero” installed for this to work.&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.93 of the portal it is also possible for an admin user to impersonate another user. See [[New features in v2.93]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====The New User Dialog====&lt;br /&gt;
By pressing the “New User” button the dialog appears as presented in Figure &amp;quot;New User Dialog&amp;quot;. Mandatory fields are User ID and the two password fields. Remember that the User ID must be unique and you will be notified if it is not. Add the roles that you want the user to have by moving roles from the left list to the right. You can hover each role to view more information about them. Click the “Add” button to add the user or change you mind by clicking “Cancel”. If you click &amp;quot;Add&amp;quot; and the roles you have selected gives the user access to some wcus tasks, you will also be prompted about giving the user access to currently running tasks on these wcus as well. This can also be done when editing the roles of a user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the new user has been created, that user is granted a default minimalistic view in both the Tasks- and Vehicles-panel. This mechanism exists to prevent new users from being overwhelmed by the large amount of columns available in these panels. Instead, they are only presented with the most important columns, with the option to see more columns if they want to. The default columns for new users are:&lt;br /&gt;
* Tasks panel&lt;br /&gt;
** Task ID&lt;br /&gt;
** Assignment name&lt;br /&gt;
** Assignment type&lt;br /&gt;
** WCU ID&lt;br /&gt;
** Status&lt;br /&gt;
** Task creator&lt;br /&gt;
** Creation date&lt;br /&gt;
** Resource group&lt;br /&gt;
* Vehicles panel&lt;br /&gt;
** WCU ID&lt;br /&gt;
** VIN&lt;br /&gt;
** WCU comment&lt;br /&gt;
** WCU software version&lt;br /&gt;
** WCU connection time&lt;br /&gt;
** Resource group&lt;br /&gt;
** Active alarms&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:NewUserDialog252.png|left|thumb|New User Dialog]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PromptNewUserCurAss.png|left|thumb|Prompt to give user permission to currently running tasks on specified wcus]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====The Edit User Dialog====&lt;br /&gt;
You can at any time modify a user by pressing the “Modify” button to bring up the dialog in Figure &amp;quot;Modify User Dialog&amp;quot;. The User ID cannot be changed. A disabled account can not be used for logging onto the portal even if the correct user name and password are given. To modify the user roles, select or deselect a role by using the check boxes. To turn on two-factor authentication for a user, check the appropriate box. When you are satisfied with your modifications, press the “Save” button to make them permanent on the portal or press the “Cancel” button if you change your mind.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To enable two factor authentication, tick the check box “Enable two factor authentication”. This will force the user to add another special one time password in addition to the account password when logging into the portal. The one time password is generated by a program on either your computer or if you want to you can install it on your smart phone which is probably the best solution. The program that generates one time password is based on a cryptographic salt and the current time. The cryptographic salt is randomly generated by the portal and is individual for each user. A secret can at any time be regenerated for a user which will render the user unable to login if you do not tick the check box “Show the secret to the user on their next login”. Advice the user to install &amp;quot;Google Authenticator&amp;quot; on their phone before they login to the portal for the first time as the secret will only be shown once and must be installed in the authenticator app at that time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Just like when adding a new user, you can give or remove roles to the user by clicking &amp;quot;Edit user roles&amp;quot; and moving roles from the left list to the right and vice versa. If you edit the user roles to add some wcu task permission to the user, you will also here be prompted about giving the user access to currently running tasks on these wcus as well.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EditUser252.png|left|thumb|Modify User Dialog]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====The Change Password Dialog====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change a user&#039;s password, press the “Change Password” button and the dialog below will appear. It is pretty straightforward as you type in the new password in the “New password” entry and you need to confirm it by typing it again in the entry below it. If you are satisfied, click the “Change” button or the “Cancel” button if you decide not to change the password.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Illustration49.png|thumb|frame|left|Change Password Dialog]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====The Show Secret Window====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Illustration50.png|thumb|frame|QR-code Window]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A QR-code is shown that can be transferred to a smart phone by simply starting the authenticator app (we recommend using &amp;quot;Google Authenticator&amp;quot;), point it at the screen and let the phone read the QR-code. An example of such a QR-code can be seen in Figure &amp;quot;QR-code Window&amp;quot;. If the application that is to be used as a password generator do not support QR codes, the secret is shown in clear text at the top.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Edit User Roles and Permissions ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here it is also possible to edit user roles and permissions, read further instructions [[Roles and permissions|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== The Labels Tab ===&lt;br /&gt;
This tab is used to administer labels. Here you can enable/disable labels, rename labels which are not system labels and it is possible to make private labels global. If the feature is enabled at your site, it is also possible to configure label announcements here. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
More about these functions can be found in [[Labels#Administer labels|Administer Labels]]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The WCU Status Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.47 the WCU status tab has changed. See [[WCU Status]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;The Following applies to portal version 2.46 and older:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This view is supposed to be used for supervising a set of vehicles. The supervision is done in real time and the values for the set of vehicles are updated as soon as they arrive on the server from the different vehicles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The set of status information collected comprises three parts:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;General information:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Alive, a heart beat signal&lt;br /&gt;
* Connectivity, what data rates are currently available to the vehicle.&lt;br /&gt;
** 4G&lt;br /&gt;
** 3G&lt;br /&gt;
** 2G&lt;br /&gt;
** none&lt;br /&gt;
* Cell Signal Quality (CSQ). Indicates the signal strength of the mobile modem. The values are between 0 – 31, the higher the value the better. The special value of 99 is designated an unknown or not even detectable signal.&lt;br /&gt;
* GPS, simply a binary indicator of fix or no fix for the GPS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Data Storage Usage:&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This set of data informs how much collected data resides in the WCU for each type of data collector (module). Total data indicates how much of the total amount of data storage available is used. After that, each type of data collector is lined up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Data Collection Status:&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When modules collect data they go through a set of states when triggers starts, stops and other events occur. Currently, only such events for the signal reader module is available. An optional message accompanying the current state is shown in parenthesis.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen is divided in two parts, on the left hand side is a table with search functionality for finding the vehicles of interest and on the right hand side is the monitored vehicles. To monitor a vehicles you search for it in the table and then drag and drop the vehicle on the right hand panel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A view of the panel is depicted in the Figure &amp;quot;WCU Status Tab&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Illustration57.png|left|frame|WCU Status Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The Key Figures Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this tab it is possible to view charts over recorded statistics for the portal. More about this option is found under [[Key Figures]].&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Henrik.Moller</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=File:ExtraBundlesTab.png&amp;diff=4072</id>
		<title>File:ExtraBundlesTab.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=File:ExtraBundlesTab.png&amp;diff=4072"/>
		<updated>2025-11-05T09:17:05Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Henrik.Moller: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;ExtraBundlesTab&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Henrik.Moller</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=File:IOTab.png&amp;diff=4071</id>
		<title>File:IOTab.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=File:IOTab.png&amp;diff=4071"/>
		<updated>2025-11-05T09:15:51Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Henrik.Moller: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;IOTab&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Henrik.Moller</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=File:UploadTab.png&amp;diff=4070</id>
		<title>File:UploadTab.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=File:UploadTab.png&amp;diff=4070"/>
		<updated>2025-11-05T09:15:33Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Henrik.Moller: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;UploadTab&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Henrik.Moller</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=File:PowerManagementTab.png&amp;diff=4069</id>
		<title>File:PowerManagementTab.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=File:PowerManagementTab.png&amp;diff=4069"/>
		<updated>2025-11-05T09:15:11Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Henrik.Moller: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;PowerManagementTab&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Henrik.Moller</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=File:WCUTab.png&amp;diff=4068</id>
		<title>File:WCUTab.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=File:WCUTab.png&amp;diff=4068"/>
		<updated>2025-11-05T09:14:51Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Henrik.Moller: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;WCUTab&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Henrik.Moller</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=File:ConnectionTab.png&amp;diff=4067</id>
		<title>File:ConnectionTab.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=File:ConnectionTab.png&amp;diff=4067"/>
		<updated>2025-11-05T09:14:27Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Henrik.Moller: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;ConnectionTab&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Henrik.Moller</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=File:ModulesTab.png&amp;diff=4066</id>
		<title>File:ModulesTab.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=File:ModulesTab.png&amp;diff=4066"/>
		<updated>2025-11-05T09:13:14Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Henrik.Moller: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;ModulesTab&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Henrik.Moller</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=The_Portal_Administrator_View&amp;diff=4065</id>
		<title>The Portal Administrator View</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=The_Portal_Administrator_View&amp;diff=4065"/>
		<updated>2025-11-05T09:06:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Henrik.Moller: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;An administrator can do everything a user can do and more. In addition to what a normal user can do, an administrator can create and modify users and stop tasks for any task. &lt;br /&gt;
These new functions will be explained in the next three chapters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We will start with the &#039;&#039;Search&#039;&#039; tab where two more buttons are visible. Next is the &#039;&#039;Vehicles&#039;&#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
Lastly is the &#039;&#039;Administration&#039;&#039; tab with five sub tabs consisting of: the &#039;&#039;Connect&#039;&#039; tab, the &#039;&#039;Archives&#039;&#039; tab the&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;GDS/SDDB files&#039;&#039; tab, the &#039;&#039;Resource Groups&#039;&#039; tab and the &#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==The Tasks Tab==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Illustration 32a.png|thumb|Stopping Running Task]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Illustration 32b.png|thumb|Force Stop Task]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition to the functionality for an ordinary user, an administrator the administrator can search and view any user&#039;s task. Also, it has one more button present. An administrator can send a &#039;&#039;Force Stop&#039;&#039; command to any WCU.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Figure &amp;quot;Stopping Running Task&amp;quot; shows the &amp;quot;Stop assigment&amp;quot; button. This button is the same as for the ordinary user and is used to stop a running task. When a running task is stopped, it changes state to &amp;quot;Stop pending&amp;quot;. This means that the portal is waiting for a stop message from the WCU before the state is changed to &amp;quot;Stopped&amp;quot; in the portal view. The administrator view&#039;s &amp;quot;Force Stop Task&amp;quot; button, which can be seen in Figure &amp;quot;Force Stop Task&amp;quot;, forces a &amp;quot;Stop pending&amp;quot; task into &amp;quot;Stopped&amp;quot; state without waiting for the stop signal from the WCU. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a portal of version 2.60 and forward, it is also possible for an administrator to remove all resultfiles for a selected task using the corresponding context menu option. When doing so, a confirmation dialog pops up to ensure that it is in fact the intended choice. Note that this option is disabled if multiple tasks are selected or if the selected task does not have any result files attached.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==The Vehicles Tab==&lt;br /&gt;
An administrator can do quite a lot of things in this view, an illustration of which is presented in Figure &amp;quot;The Administrator&#039;s Vehicles Tab&amp;quot;. The table header along with the buttons “Edit Description” and “Get Log Files” are explained in the page for &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Vehicles]]&#039;&#039;&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the bottom you have a set of buttons to aid in handling the WCUs. To add a new WCU to the portal, the “New” buttons opens up a dialog for that. The “Get Log Files” button fetches log files for the selected WCU from the portal.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Vehicles panel adm buttons Screenshot from 2023-06-28 15-06-17.png|left|thumb|800x800px|The Administrator&#039;s Vehicles Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The New WCU Dialog===&lt;br /&gt;
There are two ways that a WCU can enter the portal. The first is if you click the “New WCU” button and the second is the first time a WCU connects to the portal it registers itself. Ideally you will never have to add a WCU to the portal but just as a safety step you have the opportunity to add it yourself. When clicking the “New WCU” button the dialog presented in in Figure &amp;quot;The Add New WCU Dialog&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Illustration34.png|frame|left|The Add New WCU Dialog]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You must enter the ID of the WCU as this is a unique identifier and you will be notified if the ID is already present on the portal. The description is optional but may be handy to remember which WCU it is.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The Edit WCU Dialog===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To edit a WCU simply mark it in the table and press the button called &amp;quot;Edit WCU&amp;quot;. This results in a dialog where the fields differ depending on editability. For one selected WCU these are the comment, name, whether it is active or not, the labels for the WCU or if it requires approved assignments. However, if the WCU has tasks which have status pending, running, warning or error (or corresponding partial statuses), the active option is disabled. This is also true if the WCU is connected to a vehicle or if it is included in a resource group. By checking &amp;quot;Require approved assignments&amp;quot; you can only add assignments that have been reviewed and then approved by the reviewers. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Edit-wcu-2.87.png|alt=Edit a WCU|thumb|Edit a WCU Dialog]]&lt;br /&gt;
If the selected WCU is a resource group the dialog will appear as presented in Figure &amp;quot;Edit WCU Dialog&amp;quot;. The difference here is the &amp;quot;Apply label to resource group&#039;s WCUs&amp;quot;checkbox. When this option is selected the labels selected in the &amp;quot;Manage labels&amp;quot;-selector are also added to the WCUs included in the resource group. It is, though, not possible to remove labels from the resource group&#039;s WCUs using this checkbox. To do so use instead the context menu options for label management. [[File:Edit wcu.png|thumb|Edit a Resource Group WCU Dialog|left]]It is also possible to edit multiple WCUs simultaneously. If several WCUs are selected the dialog presented in Figure &amp;quot;Edit Multiple WCUs&amp;quot; appear. This is only possible for the fields &amp;quot;Comment&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Active&amp;quot; and these are enabled using the corresponding checkbox to the right. If one of the selected WCUs fulfill the conditions presented above for the disablement of the Active-option, it will not be possible to select the corresponding checkbox. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Edit wcu multiple.png|thumb|Edit Multiple WCUs|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Edit the WCU Configuration===&lt;br /&gt;
You can edit the configuration of the WCU from the portal. Simply click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit Configuration&#039;&#039;&#039; to open up a Tab in Figures &amp;quot;Edit Configuration: Modules&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Edit Configuration: Connection&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Edit Configuration: WCU&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Edit Configuration: Power Management&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Edit Configuration: Upload&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Edit Configuration: IO&amp;quot;, and &amp;quot;Edit Configuration: Extra bundles&amp;quot;. The WCU configuration window is divided into five tabs where each tab is described below.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=&amp;quot;150&amp;quot; mode=&amp;quot;nolines&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Wcu config1.png|Edit Configuration: Modules.&lt;br /&gt;
File:Wcu config2.png|Edit Configuration: Connection.&lt;br /&gt;
File:Wcu config3.png|Edit Configuration: WCU.&lt;br /&gt;
File:Power-management.png|alt=Power Management|Edit configuration: Power Management&lt;br /&gt;
File:Wcu config5.png|Edit Configuration: Upload.&lt;br /&gt;
File:NewOiGui.png|Edit configuration: IO&lt;br /&gt;
File:Wcu extra bundles.png|Edit Configuration: Extra bundles.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Modules====&lt;br /&gt;
The set of checkboxes for the different modules that are present are at the top. Check or uncheck these to tell the WCU if they are present or not. Disabling modules will speed up the boot process of the WCU (but will make the corresponding functionality unavailable).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To edit &amp;quot;Car type&amp;quot;, click on the field where the car type is displayed to open the &amp;quot;Edit car&amp;quot; dialog. This dialog is described in section [[The_Portal_Administrator_View#The_Edit_Car_Dialog]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The last three checkboxes, &amp;quot;Run IDC at boot&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Run IDC at ignition off&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Enable VIN reader&amp;quot; are pretty much self-explanatory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Connection====&lt;br /&gt;
This tab can be seen in Figure &amp;quot;Edit Configuration: Connection&amp;quot;  and the tab content for the WLAN part is described [[WCU as WiFi Access Point|here.]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on site,i.e. is enabled, and if the WCU software is at least 2.90.0, an option of configuring a [https://www.wireguard.com/ WireGuard] VPN is available and described here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Remote Login =====&lt;br /&gt;
Determines if it is possible to connect to the WCU remotely - possibly configured with an active time limit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on the portal setup, the following modes are possible:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* None - not possible to specify a time limit.&lt;br /&gt;
* Optional - the user may specify a time limit.&lt;br /&gt;
* Required - the user must specify a time limit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If specified, the remote logon configuration will be automatically disabled after the limit has expired. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a time limit is active, the following is possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To enable remote login - select &amp;quot;Enable&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* To enabletime limit - select &amp;quot;Time Limited&amp;quot; and enter a value for hours.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Remote login add.png|thumb|Time limited remote login - Add]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a time limit is active, the following is possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To disable remote login - deselect &amp;quot;Enable&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* To disable time limit - deselect &amp;quot;Time Limited&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* To change the time limit - select &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot; and enter a new value for hours.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Remote login edit.png|thumb|Time limited remote login - Edit]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====WCU====&lt;br /&gt;
This tab can be seen in Figure &amp;quot;Edit Configuration: WCU&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;Unit ID&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The automatically generated unique WCU identifier. The ID is immutable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;Platform type&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The WCU platform type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;Platform subtype&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The WCU platform subtype.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;WCU software version&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
This is the currently installed WCU software version.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;Preferred WCU software&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
This is the new preferred WCU software version to be installed. When updating to a new version, the configuration dialog will update itself immediately to reflect what is available in the new version, hence accordingly also when downgrading. This means that new settings regarding the WCU&#039;s modules will also be upgraded which makes it possible to edit the modules according to the new version. In addition, when creating new tasks, validation will be carried out to the new version and hence you will not have to wait for the WCU to be updated to the new version to use new features.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;Perform reset on update&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Removes all data on the WCU when installing a new WCU software.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;MX4 firmware version&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The currently installed MX4 firmware version.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;Preferred MX4 firmware&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The new preferred MX4 firmware.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.40 of the WCU software, all WCUs report its platform type. The platform type determines, among other things, the number of available CAN buses in the IO tab. (see [[I/O configurations]]) Since a resource group is a collection of WCUs it has no platform type of its own to report. From version 2.41 of the portal the user has the option to set a fictive platform type for a resource group. This is also a prerequisite to also set the [[I/O configurations]] for a resource group. The platform type (and possibly subtype) is set in the WCU tab. If the resource group has members with other platform type(s) than the type that is about to be set, the user will get a warning.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the platform type of the resource group differs from the platform type of its members the I/O tab will be disabled. This is also the case when the platform type of the resource group and one member is the same but another member has another platform type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.42 it is possible to update the WCU root password. To update the password, write the new password in &amp;quot;Set root password&amp;quot; and save the configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;WCU Local Scheduling Time Zone&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a WCU of version 2.53 or higher it is possible to configure a local time zone for the WCU using the option &amp;quot;Local scheduling time zone&amp;quot; presented in Figure &amp;quot;Edit Configuration: WCU&amp;quot;. This field consist of a drop down menu displaying the selectable time zones, which are as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
* Universal&lt;br /&gt;
* Africa/Cairo&lt;br /&gt;
* America/Anchorage&lt;br /&gt;
* America/Caracas&lt;br /&gt;
* America/Chicago&lt;br /&gt;
* America/Denver&lt;br /&gt;
* America/Los_Angeles&lt;br /&gt;
* America/New_York&lt;br /&gt;
* America/Sao_Paulo&lt;br /&gt;
* Asia/Dhaka&lt;br /&gt;
* Asia/Dubai&lt;br /&gt;
* Asia/Hong_Kong&lt;br /&gt;
* Asia/Karachi&lt;br /&gt;
* Asia/Tokyo&lt;br /&gt;
* Australia/Adelaide&lt;br /&gt;
* Australia/Brisbane&lt;br /&gt;
* Australia/Darwin&lt;br /&gt;
* Australia/Sydney&lt;br /&gt;
* Europe/London&lt;br /&gt;
* Europe/Moscow&lt;br /&gt;
* Europe/Paris&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The zone defined here will be enforced selecting &amp;quot;WCU local time&amp;quot; when scheduling a task, see description [[Creating a Task#CAN-recorder#Scheduling|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;Blink Controller&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
For WCUs of version later than or equal to 2.54 it is possible to configure the blink controller for the WCU diods, which can be set to blink in different patterns to represent different WCU states. Selecting &amp;quot;Legacy&amp;quot; in the corresponding drop down menu will result in the WCU controlling the diods and the &amp;quot;DioIPD&amp;quot;-option means that the DioIPD will controll them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;Enable NTP Server&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enable or disable the NTP server by the use of a checkbox named thereafter for WCUs of version 2.60 or later. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;WCU Certificate&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wcu certficate three files.png|thumb|Files for Certificate Update]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the WCU is version 2.52 or later you have an opportunity to update the WCU&#039;s certificate and related files. If the conditions mentioned are met you will see a checkbox saying &amp;quot;Update certificate related files&amp;quot;, see Figure &amp;quot;Files for Certificate Update&amp;quot;. When checking the checkbox, an additional three fields are revealed. They are:&lt;br /&gt;
* Certificate file, choose a certificate file to upload which is in PEM format.&lt;br /&gt;
* Private key file, choose a private key to upload in PEM format as well.&lt;br /&gt;
* Password file, choose a file with the password to the private key. The file should be plain text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You must supply all three files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to see what certificate is installed on the WCU at any time, there is text field called &amp;quot;Current fingerprint&amp;quot;. If you have recently updated a WCUs certificate, you can by hovering over the field also see if the WCU is using the latest certificate. If this the case a message saying &amp;quot;Using latest certificate&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Renew WCU Certificate&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to renew a WCU&#039;s certificate by selecting the checkbox &amp;quot;Renew certificate&amp;quot;. Doing so will automatically issue a new certificate when the configuration is saved. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RenewCertificate.png|thumb|Renew Certificate]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Enable PTP ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ptp-setting-wcu.png|alt=PTP settings in the WCU configuration|thumb|PTP settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.81.0 of the WCU software there support for starting a PTP daemon on the WCU in order to synchronize time between units connected to the WCU. The protocol is designed to attain a higher accuracy than when using NTP. When you enable the setting you must also select to which interface on the WCU the daemon should listen on. You can see what it looks like in the illustration on the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Power Management====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Periodic wake up time.png|thumb|frame|Perodic Wake-up]]&lt;br /&gt;
This tab can be seen in Figure &amp;quot;Edit Configuration: Power Management&amp;quot; and the tab content is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Power mode” has two settings: &amp;quot;Sleep&amp;quot;, Deep sleep&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Cut-off&amp;quot;. In cut-off mode, the WCU is not woken up at regular intervals to report battery voltage, GPS position etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In sleep mode, some more settings are visible which also can be seen in Figure &amp;quot;Edit Configuration: Power Management&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
You can select the WCU to remain unpowered by selecting &amp;quot;External cut-off&amp;quot;, only available for the COMMITTO platform. In addition, you may enable the WCU&#039;s wake-up functionality. This function is simply made up of a cycle time called “Periodic wake-up time” and the corresponding “Periodic run-time”. The “Periodic run-time” determines how long time the WCU should be awake before going back to sleep. The “Periodic wake-up time” indicates the time for each new wake-up cycle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.43 it is also possible to set power mode to &amp;quot;deep sleep&amp;quot; for WCUs running on platform MX4 T20/T30 and MX4 V61. The configuration is the same as for mode &amp;quot;sleep&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Example: &#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
A periodic run-time of 600 seconds means that the WCU will be alive for 600 seconds (10 minutes). A periodic wake-up time of 3600 seconds means that the WCU will start a new run-time (600 seconds in this case) every new hour. (3600 seconds = 60 min). The sleep time in each cycle is, for the general case, the wake-up time minus the run-time and in this example 3600 minus 600 = 3000 seconds (50 min).&lt;br /&gt;
This example is illustrated in Figure &amp;quot;Perodic Wake-up&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.88.0 it is possible wake on a specific CAN frame ID. The settings are the same is for the canrecorder task. There it is possible to select one specific frame or several by separating them by “,”. It is also possible to select a range between frames by using “-”. The value can either be decimal or hexadecimal. A example of a filter: “1, 0x12-0xFF”&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--You can select the MCD-Hub to remain unpowered by selecting &amp;quot;MCD-hub cut-off&amp;quot;. In addition, you may enable the WCUs wake-up functionality. This function is simply made up of a cycle time called “Periodic wake-up time” and the corresponding “Periodic run-time” which indicates for how long I should be awake before going to sleep. The committo platform has some limits on the two settings and those are: minimum time to set between wake-ups is 10 minutes and the maximum time is 12 hours.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====WMU&#039;s Power Management====&lt;br /&gt;
If your Portal has [[WMU | WMU&#039;s]] enabled and you have added WMU&#039;s to the WCU Configuration in the [[I/O_configurations#Add_WMU(s) | I/O Configurations tab]], then the Power Management controls &amp;quot;Power Mode&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Wake on CAN&amp;quot; are present for each WMU with a tab of their own. These tabs are found at the top of the dialog window next to the WCU&#039;s Power Management tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Upload====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;upload tab wcu configuration&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This tab can be seen in Figure &amp;quot;Edit Configuration: Upload&amp;quot; and the tab content is described in the table below.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot; | Mobile upload limit&lt;br /&gt;
| Defines the maximum data size that should be transferred via the mobile network. If the data size is larger than that the WCU will wait until a connection to a local network can be established. The size is in Mbytes.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot; | Post run grace timeout&lt;br /&gt;
| The number of seconds to wait before communicating with the portal, if the ignition is turned off.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot; | Upload timeout&lt;br /&gt;
| The maximum number of seconds the WCU should upload data before stopping.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot; | Erase error code&lt;br /&gt;
| If turned on the error codes in the vehicle will be reset.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot; | Upload data at boot&lt;br /&gt;
| Uploads data when the WCU boots up.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot; | Upload data at ignition off&lt;br /&gt;
| Uploads data when the ignition of the vehicle is turned off.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Upload periodically&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|Uploads data every 10 minutes.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====IO====&lt;br /&gt;
Version &amp;gt;= 2.41 of the portal has a new tab named I/O. You can read more about in [[I/O_configurations]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Extra bundles====&lt;br /&gt;
[[Extra bundles|For more information about Extra bundles, click here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From portal version 2.47 and if the WCU is running 2.47 (or is about to be upgraded to 2.47) there is a new tab &amp;quot;Extra bundles&amp;quot; in the WCU configuration window, see Figure &amp;quot;Edit Configuration: Extra bundles&amp;quot;. In the tab, it is possible to select additional software to be installed on the WCU. The installation will start as soon as the WCU fetches the updated configuraton. This tab is only enabled if the current WCU is an MX4.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The Edit Vehicle Dialog===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Illustration37.png|thumb|200px|right|Edit One Vehicle]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Illustration38.png|thumb|200px|right|Edit Several Vehicles]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To edit the information about a car, press the “Edit Vehicle” button. The dialog in Figure &amp;quot;Edit One Vehicle&amp;quot; opens up.The one entry you can not edit is the VIN entry. If you need to edit that you must instead create a new car.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order for the portal to be able to translate Diagnostic Trouble Codes into a human readable format, you must choose a diagnostic DB file to be used. It is important to select the correct one as the diagnostic trouble codes read out might be translated incorrectly or (more probable), not at all. It is also important to select the right type of vehicle using “Vehicle type”. This controls the number of CAN buses and the number of Ethernet networks, if any, in the vehicle. If the selected vehicle is connected to a WCU in a resource group, strict or not, this option is disabled. To enable it it either has to be disconnected from the WCU or the WCU must be excluded from its resource group. The “Active” check box controls whether the vehicle should show up in tables and searches in general concerning cars. A vehicle can never be removed as it has probably been involved in measurements but to recall an inactivated vehicle you must actively select to view inactivated vehicles. However, if the vehicle is connected to a WCU this option will be disabled from editing. In order to deactivate such a vehicle you need to first disconnect it from the WCU. It is possible to choose not to update history vehicles with the provided changes. This option should only used in specific cases and with a well grounded reason. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to update several vehicles at once by selecting multiple vehicles and then press the “Edit Vehicle” button. By doing this you can selectively make changes to attributes, except for the VIN and plate number, for all the selected vehicles at once. This is achieved using the extended dialog presented in Figure &amp;quot;Edit Several Vehicles&amp;quot;. The options which are to be edited for all vehicles must be selected using the corresponding checkbox. If not, the option is disabled, as for instance the &amp;quot;Comment&amp;quot;-option in the &amp;quot;Edit Several Vehicles&amp;quot;-figure.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Add Vehicle Dialog ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Add-car-dialog.png|alt=add car dialog|thumb|Add Vehicle dialog]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Save car response dialog.png|thumb|Response dialog when creating a new vehicle]]&lt;br /&gt;
Usually you do not have to create vehicles manually, they are created automatically by the WCU if they are not found. It is possible, however, to create a vehicle manually using the portal by pressing the button &amp;quot;Add Vehicle&amp;quot; in the vehicles panel. By doing so you will be presented with the dialog found on the right. Here you can set a number of attributes. Important to remember is that the field VIN is mandatory and must be unique among all vehicles registered on the portal. From version 2.57 of the portal the checkbox &amp;quot;Generate unique VIN&amp;quot; is present to the right of the input field VIN. By checking that box a unique VIN will be generated once you save the vehicle. The name consists of a prefix, which is centrally preconfigured, and a monotonically increasing integer number. After pressing save you will be presented with the following dialog (in the right below). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you have the opportunity to inspect the generated VIN and your other settings. You can either select to dismiss the dialog or go to the result which means that the newly created vehicle will be presented in the table in the vehicles panel.&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Upload a Vehicle Import File===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using &#039;&#039;Upload Vehicle Import File&#039;&#039;,&lt;br /&gt;
you can import vehicles using a [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Comma-separated_values csv file].&lt;br /&gt;
This can be used both to create&lt;br /&gt;
new vehicles&lt;br /&gt;
and optionally to update existing ones.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The header is a bit special:&lt;br /&gt;
a set of columns are treated specially,&lt;br /&gt;
and the rest are added to the resulting vehicle as labels.&lt;br /&gt;
The special column headers are listed below,&lt;br /&gt;
but are also the same fields you find in the [[#Add Vehicle Dialog|Add Vehicle dialog]].&lt;br /&gt;
These are case-insensitive&lt;br /&gt;
and the order of them does not matter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As mentioned,&lt;br /&gt;
remaining columns are interpreted as labels&lt;br /&gt;
and are added to all imported vehicles.&lt;br /&gt;
New labels are created as valued labels,&lt;br /&gt;
and are given an empty value for rows with empty data.&lt;br /&gt;
If there is data present,&lt;br /&gt;
it will be saved as the value of the label for the corresponding vehicles.&lt;br /&gt;
If the label already exists&lt;br /&gt;
but is not a valued label,&lt;br /&gt;
the column &#039;&#039;&#039;must&#039;&#039;&#039; be empty.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Special header values:&lt;br /&gt;
; VIN&lt;br /&gt;
: VIN specifying what car the row refers to. &#039;&#039;&#039;Required&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
; regNr&lt;br /&gt;
: License plate number.&lt;br /&gt;
; description&lt;br /&gt;
; project&lt;br /&gt;
; protoNumber&lt;br /&gt;
; tsu&lt;br /&gt;
; series&lt;br /&gt;
; profile&lt;br /&gt;
: Name of [[Vehicle Profiles|Vehicle Profile]]&lt;br /&gt;
; diagnostics&lt;br /&gt;
: Name of [[Vehicle Profiles#Manage Description files|Diagnostics DB]] file  &lt;br /&gt;
Full header for copying: &#039;&#039;VIN,regNr,description,project,protoNumber,tsu,series,profile,diagnostics&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Show or export SIM card ID ===&lt;br /&gt;
The SIM card ID for a single WCU can be seen when right-clicking on a WCU in the Vehicles tab and selecting &amp;quot;Show info&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SIM card ID&#039;s for one or multiple WCUs can also be exported as a csv file. Select the WCUs you are interested in (in the Vehicles tab) and press the button &amp;quot;Export SIM card info&amp;quot; located in the bottom row below the Vehicles grid. The downloaded file will contain five columns: WCU ID, WCU Name, RegNr (Plate nr), VIN and SIM Card ID. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Upload WCU file ===&lt;br /&gt;
The WCU attributes &#039;WCU Name&#039; and &#039;WCU Comment&#039; can from version 2.43 of the portal be updated for multiple WCUs via a comma separated txt/xls/xlsx file. Click the &amp;quot;Upload WCU File&amp;quot; button to open up the import file to upload dialog. Remember that this function is only for updating already existing WCUs, WCUs not existing cannot be added using this function.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The uploaded file has the following requirements:&lt;br /&gt;
* The file must have two mandatory columns with the names &#039;WCU ID&#039; and &#039;WCU Name&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* Furthermore, an optional column named &#039;Comments&#039; can be added. &lt;br /&gt;
* The columns should be in said order.&lt;br /&gt;
* The amount of columns on each row must match the amount of columns in the header. &lt;br /&gt;
* The columns should be separated by using tab or by a comma.&lt;br /&gt;
If there is a &#039;Comment&#039; column and a blank comment on a row then the old comment, if any, for the specific WCU will be kept. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To remove a comment from a WCU simply check the checkbox for erasing comments. Doing so will result in that empty comments in the uploaded file will erase current comments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Upload a file describing ECU pin codes for a vehicle ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Upload vehicle pins file Screenshot from 2023-06-28 15-22-22.png|thumb|Upload of a vehicle pin code file]]&lt;br /&gt;
ECU pin codes can be specific for a vehicle. This makes it possible to [https://wiki.alkit.se/wice284/index.php/Creating_a_Task#SWDL create an SWDL assignment] for multiple vehicles in one go. In order for this to work you must first prepare all such vehicles by uploading a file describing the different pin codes. When using the button &amp;quot;Upload Vehicles pins&amp;quot; multiple vehicles can be described in one file. The format of such a file is  row based where each row should be &#039;&#039;&#039;vin;ecu;pin&#039;&#039;&#039;. The ecu field is the hexadecimal address the ECU. When pressing the button &amp;quot;Upload Vehicles pins&amp;quot; you will be presented with the dialog found to the right.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Context-vehicle-pin-code-file.png|thumb|The context menu choice for uploading a ECU pin code file for a single vehicle.]]&lt;br /&gt;
There is also on option available with a context menu (right click a row) where a singe vehicle is targeted. The format of the file is the same except that no vin should be in the file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:Shelve and Unshelve a WCU}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Resource Groups==&lt;br /&gt;
As described above in [[Vehicles#Resource Groups]], you can define a set of resource groups in order to easily handle large groups of resources collectively. An example is if you have 100&lt;br /&gt;
WCUs in such a resource group and you would like to edit the configuration for all WCUs. Instead of having to open the configuration for each individual WCU, you simply open the configuration for the resource group, do your edits and when you press save, the configuration&lt;br /&gt;
will be saved to all WCUs in one go. Resource groups are created in the [[The Portal Administrator View#Resource group|Resource groups panel]], described further below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AddWCUtoResourceGroup.png|thumb|Adding Resources to Resource Group|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
==== Add a resource to a resource group ====&lt;br /&gt;
To add resources to a resource group you start by selecting the resources you are interested in adding to a resource group. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are satisfied with your selection, press the button “Add WCU(s) to resource group”. Pressing this button will show the dialog to the left. The group box will list the available groups. If you know the name of the resource group you can type the name and as you type the box will show names that fit what you type. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The two check boxes requires a deeper discussion. Assume you have a resource group that has been used for some time. A new WCU is registered on the portal and you would like to add that WCU to your group. A common situation is that you would like that WCU to be configured the same way as the rest of the WCUs in the resource group. This is accomplished by checking “Update WCU configuration”. If this requires an update of the WCU software it will automatically be taken care of. Also, a WCU comes pre-configured with a set of modules. Usually you will probably want to update the module configurations as well. In order to do so, it is required that you also update the WCU-configuration. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you leave the &amp;quot;Update WCU configuration&amp;quot; and/or &amp;quot;Update module configuration&amp;quot; unchecked, that selection of only in this instant. If you later change the resource group configuration (or module configuration), that change will be applied to all resources in the group. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ConfirmMovingResourceToResourceGroup.png|thumb|Dialog: WCU Moved to Another Resource Group|right]] &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==== Moving a resource between resource groups ====&lt;br /&gt;
In this same dialog it is also possible to move WCUs between resource groups. Just as with adding a WCU to a resource group, select the WCU(s) you wish to move and press the &amp;quot;Add WCU(s) to resource group&amp;quot; button. If a WCU already belongs to a resource group, that resource group is listed in the grid alongside the WCU. Select the desired resource group you wish to move the WCU to, in the group box and press the &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot; button. An information dialog will pop up, informing you that a WCU will move from one resource group to another. Press &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; to confirm the WCU moving to a new resource group or press &amp;quot;Cancel&amp;quot; to return to the previous dialog. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AddWCUToStrictResourceGroup.png|thumb|Adding/Moving WCU to Strict Resource Group.|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==== Requirements for moving or adding a resource to a strict resource group ====&lt;br /&gt;
When adding or moving WCUs to a strict resource group, it is required that the WCU shares the same platform type (and platform subtype, should one exist) and that a car is connected to the WCU (see [[Strict resource group|strict resource groups]]). Furthermore, updating the WCU-configuration and the module configurations are mandatory and, as such, these options are set and not able to be changed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Modules for the WCU==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot from 2021-09-10 15-34-09.png|alt=Tool configurations.|thumb|687x687px|Selecting Tool Configurations]]&lt;br /&gt;
Each WCU supports a number of modules. The modules are software components realizing specific functions, such as a measurement tool, a data source or software component. Some modules correspond to external measurement devices connected to the WCU, whereas other are built-in. This makes it possible to add new peripherals to the WCU for handling various tasks in acquiring measured data from a car. The set of currently available modules are:&lt;br /&gt;
# Area5&lt;br /&gt;
# Audio&lt;br /&gt;
# Blue piraT&lt;br /&gt;
# Canrecorder&lt;br /&gt;
# DLT&lt;br /&gt;
# DoIP&lt;br /&gt;
# ETAS&lt;br /&gt;
# Ethernet capture&lt;br /&gt;
# GPS&lt;br /&gt;
# IDC&lt;br /&gt;
# IPEmotion RT&lt;br /&gt;
# LPD&lt;br /&gt;
# M-log&lt;br /&gt;
# MCD-Hub (deprecated)&lt;br /&gt;
# MQTT&lt;br /&gt;
# Rapid Prototyping (RP)&lt;br /&gt;
# Signal Reader&lt;br /&gt;
# Smart Eye&lt;br /&gt;
# Soft-Hub&lt;br /&gt;
# State of Health (SoH)&lt;br /&gt;
# Software Download (SWDL)&lt;br /&gt;
# Uptime&lt;br /&gt;
# Video&lt;br /&gt;
# Vinreader&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To deal with each module&#039;s configuration a new view is presented below. To open this view, press the button “Modules” as shown in Figure &amp;quot;The Administrator&#039;s Vehicles Tab&amp;quot; in [[#The Vehicles Tab]].&lt;br /&gt;
In Figure &amp;quot;Selecting Tool Configurations&amp;quot; there are a set of tools present where each type is grouped on the left side using a stack panel. Show the Signal Reader settings by selecting the Signal Reader stack and select the Canrecorder stack to see the canrecorder settings and so forth.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each tool has its own entry in each of the stacks. In Figure &amp;quot;Handling Tool Configurations&amp;quot; there is only one MCD-Hub present and it is “0”. Each tool is recognized with a tool ID which is set by the WCU. This ID is usually not descriptive and therefore you have the possibility to set a name of your likings. Change the name by pressing the button “Edit name”. You can also add a description to the tool that shows up as a “tool tip” when hovering over the name of the selected tool. Analogously, change the description by pressing the button “Edit description”. To reload the set of available tools  press the “Reload” button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Below each tool configuration there messages are presented to indicate the module status. The different types of which are presented in Figure &amp;quot;Module Status Indicators&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=&amp;quot;200&amp;quot; mode=&amp;quot;nolines&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Modules no settings changed.png|Module Status Indicators&lt;br /&gt;
File:Modules settings not saved.png&lt;br /&gt;
File:Modules settings saved.png&lt;br /&gt;
File:Modules tool upgrade pending.png&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a module is selected, or reloaded, it will say &amp;quot;No settings saved&amp;quot;. In this mode the save-button is disabled and it will not be enabled until one of the settings is edited. Then the message &amp;quot;Settings not saved&amp;quot; appears until the save button is pressed. When the configuration is successfully saved, the status is updated to &amp;quot;Settings saved&amp;quot; and the Save-button is once again disabled. In addition, if there is a pending upgrade of the tool, this also will be indicated below the configuration panel.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot from 2021-04-09 10-54-55.png|thumb|Module status with information on when it was changed and by whom]]&lt;br /&gt;
In addition to the module status indicator above, a date and user will show when the configuration was changed and by whom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configure the Arcos Module ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ArcosNewModule.png|alt=Arcos-module|thumb|Arcos-module]]&lt;br /&gt;
As of version 2.71 of the portal, Arcos tasks can be created and these are the configurations variables that can be configured:&lt;br /&gt;
* Username&lt;br /&gt;
* Password&lt;br /&gt;
* Frontend number&lt;br /&gt;
*Current firmware&lt;br /&gt;
*Desired firmware&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Debug level]]&lt;br /&gt;
When configuring the module on a resource group level the username and password will be set on all resources in the resource group. The frontend number however, will not be updated on all the resources but rather retain the individual settings made on each resource.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order for the &amp;quot;Current firmware&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Desired firmware&amp;quot; field to show the WCU software version needs to be 2.85.0 or later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configure the Area5 Module ===&lt;br /&gt;
As of version 2.61 of the portal, it is possible to create Area5 tasks. The Area5 tool only has one configuration, the [[debug level]], which determines the level of logging during the execution of the Area5 tasks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configure the Audio Module ===&lt;br /&gt;
The audio module can be configured both regarding &#039;&#039;&#039;recording&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;monitoring&#039;&#039;&#039;. The recording settings refer to what is recorded on the WCU to disc to be uploaded, whereas the monitoring settings refer to the parameters used for monitoring live audio.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The available recording settings are:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Device&#039;&#039;&#039;, can be set to internal or USB, where default is internal&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Channels&#039;&#039;&#039;, can be set to either 1 (mono) or 2 (stereo), default is 2&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Sample rate&#039;&#039;&#039;, can be set to 48000, 44100, 16000 or 8000. Default is 48000. The unit is Hz.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Recording volume&#039;&#039;&#039;, can be set to a value between 0 and 100, where default is 95.&lt;br /&gt;
The available monitoring settings are:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Channels&#039;&#039;&#039;, 1 (mono) or 2 (stereo). Default is 1.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Codec&#039;&#039;&#039;, LPCM, GSM or G.711. Default is LPCM (Linear PCM 16 bits per sample, 16 kHz).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Destination IP address&#039;&#039;&#039;. This is the address to where the audio is sent for live monitoring.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable monitoring&#039;&#039;&#039;. In order to monitor audio live for an audio task, the module must be enabled for monitoring. If the task is enabled for monitoring but the module is not, no audio can be monitored live. Default is disabled.&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to have four audio sources simultaneously. To add a new source, simply press the button &amp;quot;Add audio source&amp;quot; and the corresponding settings will appear in a new tab. If there already is an audio source with device set to internal, the new device will have default device USB. However, if there is no previous device set to internal, this will be the default option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configure the Blue piraT Module ===&lt;br /&gt;
As of version 2.44 of the portal it is possible to create blue piraT tasks. The blue piraT tool only has one configuration, the [[debug level]], which determines the level of logging during the execution of the blue piraT tasks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configure the Canrecorder Module ===&lt;br /&gt;
The configurable settings for the Canrecorder module can be seen in Figure &amp;quot;Settings for the Canrecorder module&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modules Canrecorder.png|thumb|left|250px|Settings for the Canrecorder module]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the aforementioned figure, it is clear that this panel can be used to edit the speed on both the high- and low-speed CAN-buses. It is also possible to set the date for which the update is valid, the canrecorder version and the debug level.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configure the DLT Module ===&lt;br /&gt;
For WCUs with software version earlier than 2.72.0 the DLT module have two DLT-specific settings, one for the daemon address and one for the daemon port. Have a look [[DLT Module|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For WCUs with software version 2.72.0 or later, the daemon addresses and ports (several daemons are supported from this version) are instead specified when creating a [[Creating a Task#Diagnostic Log and Trace (DLT)|Diagnostic Log and Trace (DLT) task]]. The only thing specified in the module is the debug level - the level of logging from the WCU regarding its handling of this task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configure the DoIP Module ===&lt;br /&gt;
In figure &amp;quot;Settings for the DoIP module&amp;quot; the configuration for the DoIP module is presented.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Proxy address:&#039;&#039;&#039; The proxy address for the DoIP module.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Proxy port:&#039;&#039;&#039; The proxy port.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ID:&#039;&#039;&#039; The ID of the DoIP module.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Active session:&#039;&#039;&#039; Checkbox to let the DoIP module start announcing an ongoing synchronous diagnostic session. This is typically done by setting a LED on the WCU connected to the vehicle, signaling that a synchronous diagnostic session is ongoing. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Proxy address should usually be set to the localhost IP address 127.0.0.1 for technical reasons (it will be tunneled) and the proxy port number should usually be 6757. The ID is a textual string that identifies a particular user group that will gain access to the WCUs by configuring the client interface system with the same identifier. (This configuration is done at doipc install time.) All WCUs configured with the same ID will be reachable through the same client system interface. For more information see [[Remote Diagnostics over IP (DoIP)|Remote Diagnostics over IP (DoIP)]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modules DoIP.png|thumb|left|250px|Settings for the DoIP module]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configure the ETAS Module ===&lt;br /&gt;
In Figure &amp;quot;Settings for the ETAS module&amp;quot; the configuration panel for the ETAS module is presented. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modules ETAS.png|thumb|left|250px|Settings for the ETAS module]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This panel can be used to change the username and password as well as the debug level.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configure the Ethernet capture module ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot from 2021-04-01 09-34-02.png|thumb|Settings for the Ethernet capture module]]&lt;br /&gt;
The only available setting here is debug level.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configure the File fetcher module ===&lt;br /&gt;
The only available setting here is [[debug level]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configure the GPS Module===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot from 2021-04-01 09-36-42.png|thumb|Settings for the GPS module]]&lt;br /&gt;
There are four settings involved:&lt;br /&gt;
# Enable GPS. Sets whether the GPS should be enabled or not. If you disable the GPS all the other settings will also be disabled.&lt;br /&gt;
# GPS sampling interval. Sets the position sampling interval in seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
# GPS monitor enabled. If this setting is enabled the WCU will continuously send its GPS position to the portal enabling real-time monitoring of the whereabouts of the WCU.&lt;br /&gt;
# GPS monitor interval. Set how often the position will be updated. The interval is in seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configure the IDC Module===&lt;br /&gt;
The IDC module can be configured with which CAN bus to communicate with the vehicle. You can actually even choose both where it will first try the Ethernet network (ETH), if it exists, and the CAN bus. If the car type in question does not have an Ethernet network, only the CAN option will appear.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot from 2021-10-19 10-17-38.png|none|thumb|Settings for the IDC module]]&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.68.0 another option also exists where the file output format can be set.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with version 2.94.0, a new field called &#039;&#039;Tester Address&#039;&#039; has been introduced. This field offers three options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;External Diagnostics Test Equipment&#039;&#039;&#039; with a value of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;0x0E80&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;External Prolonged Data Collection Equipment&#039;&#039;&#039; with a value of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;0x0F80&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Other&#039;&#039;&#039;, which allows users to enter a custom value&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The standard range for custom values is between &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;0x0E80&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;0x0FFF&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, but users may also enter a value outside this range if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configure the IPEmotion RT Module===&lt;br /&gt;
The IPEmotion RT module can be configured with SFTP port, username and password.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configure the LPD Module===&lt;br /&gt;
The LPD module can be configured with a list of usernames. Each &amp;quot;Username&amp;quot; field represents one username in that list. Use the button next to the field to add another username.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configure the M-log Module===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot from 2022-04-21 16-11-28.png|alt=Settings for the M-log module|left|thumb|250x250px|Settings for the M-log module]]&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.75.0 of the M-log module there are two more fields present. They are &amp;quot;Current firmware&amp;quot; which is the last known firmware for the M-log logger. &amp;quot;Desired firmware&amp;quot; consists of a drop-down list a out-of-band firmware files present on the portal. Select one the files and the WCU will try to apply the firmware upgrade to the M-log as soon as possible.&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configure the MCD-Hub Module===&lt;br /&gt;
The MCD-Hub module is deprecated and should not be used anymore. The configuration for the MCD-Hub has only two settings. The first is the MCD-Hubs IP address and the second is is “MCD-Hub firmware version” which shows the current version used by the hub. The other two configuration settings  are the preferred firmware version and the second is “Last configuration update date” which states when the MCD-Hubs current configuration was brought into action.&lt;br /&gt;
When you are done with your configuration you save it by pressing the “Save” button. If you for any reason need to reload the configuration, press the “Reload” button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configure the MQTT Module===&lt;br /&gt;
The available settings for the MQTT Module is presented in Figure &amp;quot;Settings for the MQTT module&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modules MQTT.png|thumb|left|250px|Settings for the MQTT module]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This panel can be used to define an alternative host for the MQTT broker. Default is, as displayed in the illustration, localhost. Here you can also change the debug level for the module.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configure the RP Module===&lt;br /&gt;
For this module it is only possible to configure modify the debug level, see Figure &amp;quot;Settings for the RP module&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Illustration44.png|thumb|left|250px|Settings for the RP module]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
More information on how to use the RP module is found in the [[WICE RP Manual]] and the [[WICE RP How-To]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configure the Signal Reader Module===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Signal-reader-module-2.88.png|alt=Settings for the Signal Reader module|thumb|318x318px|Settings for the Signal Reader module]]&lt;br /&gt;
As of version 2.33 of the WCU software it is possible to monitor signals in real time. For this to happen you must enable the feature by checking the box “Enable monitor” illustrated in Figure &amp;quot;Settings for the Signal Reader module&amp;quot;. The monitoring can either be set as asynchronous or synchronous. In the former case, there is a regular signal communication with the portal and in the latter case with a specified destination port. For the synchronous case it is also possible to specify which transport protocol to use: TCP or UDP. The monitoring rate for both cases is set using the &amp;quot;Interval&amp;quot; field, where the default is once per second.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also here it is possible to define the debug level. Further, the module settings include selecting whether or not the MDF files are to be written upon recorder stop and the version of the generated MDF file. In the sampling section there are two main choices; whether or not to record samples on change and enabling/disabling of piecewise linear approximation (PLA). If samples are to be recorded on change, it is possible to also choose to include one sample before the change. With the choice of PLA comes the option of defining the error percentage for the signal range and the maximum segment length in number of samples.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thereafter you can select whether to aggregate ReadDataByIdentifier (service 22) diagnostic requests and which channel that should be used as the default diagnostics channel. Default interface can be CAN or DoIP and will affect the assignment that has the interface &amp;quot;Default Channel&amp;quot; selected and also the DREC. It is also possible to enter appropriate values for the diagnostics timeout. The timeout values determine how long time to wait for diagnostic responses before assuming that there are none. Typically, the timeout for sequence file diagnostics is set to a higher value due to the fact that it doesn&#039;t negatively impact the update frequency of active (diagnostics) signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.88.0 it is possible to select the MDF4 format when logging frames.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with version 2.94.0, a new field called &#039;&#039;Tester Address&#039;&#039; has been introduced. This field offers three options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;External Diagnostics Test Equipment&#039;&#039;&#039; with a value of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;0x0E80&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;External Prolonged Data Collection Equipment&#039;&#039;&#039; with a value of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;0x0F80&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Other&#039;&#039;&#039;, which allows users to enter a custom value&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The standard range for custom values is between &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;0x0E80&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;0x0FFF&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, but users may also enter a value outside this range if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configure the SmartEye Module===&lt;br /&gt;
The configuration for this module is identical to that of the RP module, depicted in Figure &amp;quot;Settings for the RP module&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configure the Soft-Hub===&lt;br /&gt;
As for the RP and Smarteye module, its only editable parameter is the debug level using a panel as displayed in Figure &amp;quot;Settings for the RP module&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configure the State of Health Module===&lt;br /&gt;
The state of health module has the same settings as the IDC module above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configure the Software Download Module===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The SWDL module has the same settings as the IDC module above apart from one difference highlighted in red in Figure &amp;quot;Settings for the Software Download Module&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modules SWDL.png|thumb|left|250px|Settings for the Software Download Module]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For WCUs of version 2.53 and forward it is possible to allow updates to be performed without manual interaction by checking the high-lighted checkbox. If this option is chosen, the updates will instead be performed as soon as possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configure the Uptime Module===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This module is used to report how much and how long the WCU is running and its configuration is set using the panel displayed in Figure &amp;quot;Settings for the Uptime Module&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Illustration43.png|thumb|left|250px|Settings for the Uptime Module]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First of all you can enable/disable the functionality all together with the “Enabled” checkbox. Next is how often the up-time should be logged in seconds. The second check box, “Monitor enabled” is used when you would like the module to report its up-time in real-time and the interval for that, also in seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configure the Video Module ===&lt;br /&gt;
A description of how to configure the video module can be found here. An explanation of the module in more general terms is found in the [[WICE video]] section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The video module can be configured both regarding the recording and the monitoring. The recording parameters refers to what is recorded on the WCU to disc to be uploaded, whereas the monitoring parameters refer to the live video that is streamed from the WCU.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The available &#039;&#039;&#039;recording&#039;&#039;&#039; settings are:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Width&#039;&#039;&#039;, which is the width in pixels of the recorded video.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Height&#039;&#039;&#039;, which is the height in pixels of the recorded video.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Frame rate&#039;&#039;&#039;, which is the number of video frames per second to be recorded.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Codec&#039;&#039;&#039;, which is the video codec used when recording video clips to disc. Avaliable codecs are JPEG and VP8. (Note that the video that is uploaded to the portal is typically transcoded to MPEG-4 format, and codec only refers to the recording phase in the WCU.)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Clip size&#039;&#039;&#039;, which is the size in seconds or bytes of clips recorded on the WCU. The clips are subsequently concatenated on the Portal, if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Clip unit&#039;&#039;&#039;, which is the unit for the clip size setting (bytes or seconds).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The available &#039;&#039;&#039;monitoring&#039;&#039;&#039; settings are:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable monitoring&#039;&#039;&#039;, which enables or disables monitoring of video.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Width&#039;&#039;&#039;, which is the width in pixels of the monitored video.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Height&#039;&#039;&#039;, which is the height in pixels of the monitored video.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Frame rate&#039;&#039;&#039;, which is the number of video frames per second to be recorded.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Codec&#039;&#039;&#039;, which is the video codec used when streaming monitored video. Avaliable codecs are JPEG and VP8.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Destination IP address&#039;&#039;&#039;, which is the IP address to which monitored video is transmitted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is also a setting for rotating the video, to be used if the camera is installed upside-down or at a 45 degree angle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configure the Vinreader Module ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SettingForTheVinReaderModule.png|alt=Settings for the Vinreader module|thumb|250x250px|Settings for the Vinreader module]]&lt;br /&gt;
The method of reading a vehicle&#039;s VIN (Vehicle Identification Number) can be set to &#039;&#039;&#039;SPA29&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;OBD2&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;SPA11, BP, TEA2+, UDS, DoIP&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;, SOVD&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;FIXED&#039;&#039;&#039;. The preferred setting for this is OBD2, whereby a standardized OBD-II diagnostic service is used to read out the VIN. SPA29 and SPA11 refers to using CAN diagnostic requests using either 29 bit or 11 bit SPA addressing respectively. The CAN channel (on the WCU) is selected in &#039;Default CAN channel&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the setting FIXED is used, the VIN will not be read out from the vehicle using a diagnostic service, but rather a preset value entered in the item named &#039;Fixed VIN&#039; is used. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot from 2022-04-22 09-09-21.png|alt=Vehicle ID method type|thumb|Vehicle ID method type]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot from 2022-04-22 09-55-55.png|alt=No identifying label selected|thumb|No identifying label selected]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Skärmavbild 2019-12-18 kl. 15.17.58.png|thumb|Audio module settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;Save VIN&#039; is a checkbox for save vin. As default the box is checked which means that it will save the VIN number if the WCU can successfully read it. If the &#039;Save VIN&#039; is unchecked then the WCU will try to read the VIN number every time it boots.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are currently two ways of identifying a vehicle, either by reading the VIN or the chassis number. The selection is shown in Illustration &#039;Vehicle ID method type&#039; to the right. When using &#039;Chassis NO&#039; as identification type you must select which valued label to use for this mechanism. If no such label has been selected, you will see the the text &#039;No label selected in backend&#039; to the right of the selected type, see Illustration &#039;No identifying label selected&#039; on the right. To select which label to use, head over to the [[Labels#Administer labels|label administration tab]] to make the selection. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with version 2.94.0, a new field called &#039;&#039;Tester Address&#039;&#039; has been introduced. This field offers three options: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;External Diagnostics Test Equipment&#039;&#039;&#039; with a value of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;0x0E80&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;External Prolonged Data Collection Equipment&#039;&#039;&#039; with a value of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;0x0F80&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Other&#039;&#039;&#039;, which allows users to enter a custom value&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The standard range for custom values is between &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;0x0E80&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;0x0FFF&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, but users may also enter a value outside this range if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; For the &#039;&#039;Tester Address&#039;&#039; field to appear in this module, the vehicle&#039;s VIN must be set to &#039;&#039;&#039;SPA29&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==The Administration Tab==&lt;br /&gt;
This tab is a collection of the administrative tasks available in the portal. These are “Connect car to WCU”, “Archives”, “GDS/SDDB file”, “Resource Groups”, “Users”, &amp;quot;Labels&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;WCU Status&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Key Figures&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The Connect Car to WCU Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To archive which vehicle a specific WCU was in at the time a task was run can be done by connecting a vehicle to a WCU in this tab. This is usually done automatically but in some situations it is necessary to do this manually&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The area is divided into two tables, one for searching WCUs, the left one, and one for searching vehicles, the right one. When you start typing the name of the WCU you are looking for in the upper left corner just above the table, matching WCUs appear in the left table. To find the vehicle you are looking for, you do the same in the right table but here you have the option of using either the VIN or plate number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To connect a WCU with a vehicle you drag the WCU you would like to connect onto the vehicle in the right table. When you drop it onto a car a small icon will show signifying that the WCU and vehicle are connected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.42 it is also possible to select a WCU and a Car and then click on the new &amp;quot;Connect&amp;quot; button located between the two grids.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To disconnect a WCU and car you simply press the icon for wither of the WCU or car.&lt;br /&gt;
See Figure &amp;quot;Connect Cars to WCU&amp;quot; for an example.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Illustration 45.png|thumb|frame|left|600px|Connect Cars to WCU]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The connection is a sort of instantaneous carbon copy of the situation at the time that a task was created. If you later change the connection, already running/run tasks will not be affected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The Resource Groups Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
This tab is used to administer some parts of the creation and destruction of resource groups and more. The panel for administering the resource groups is depicted in the Figure &amp;quot;Resource Group Tab&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Resource-groups-administration.png|left|thumb|800x800px|Resource Group Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the top is a search field to search for resource groups. Next are two tables, side by side. The left table lists the resource groups found depending on your search criteria. When a resource group is selected, the resources that are part of the resource group are shown in the right table. Next, the functionality of the buttons will be covered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Add and Remove Resource Groups====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CreateNewResourceGroup.png|thumb|Add Resource Group Dialog]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add a resource group you simply press the “New resource group” button and the following window will show. Here you can type the name for the new resource group, set the resource group as strict (see [[Strict resource group|Strict Resource Groups]]) and, if you choose to set the resource group as strict, set what platform type and platform sub type it should have. When you feel satisfied with your selections press “Create” to create the resource group. If you change your mind, press the “Cancel” button. Resource groups are global and writable and that means that names must be unique. The reason for this is that a resource group name takes on the form as both the resources car and WCU and those must be unique and therefore the resource groups must also be unique. One can, however, imagine situations where this must not be enforced but at the moment this is the case.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To remove a resource group, press the “Remove resource group” button. Be aware that no warning is given if there are resources in the group when removing it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Copy Resource group ====&lt;br /&gt;
If you have set up the configuration for a resource group it is sometimes convenient to make a copy of the resource group under a new name. To do this, select the resource group you would like to copy and press &amp;quot;Copy resource group&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Default labels ====&lt;br /&gt;
Default labels are a group of labels that will be associated with WCU or/and vehicle when a WCU joins a resource group. These labels will not affect current WCU/Vehicles in the resource group. To edit the set of labels press the “Edit default labels” button. New window will show. Read more about the edit default labels window [[Edit default labels window|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Approved Assignments ====&lt;br /&gt;
You can require that assignments must have been reviewed and approved before they can be applied to a resource group by checking the box &amp;quot;Require Approved Assignments&amp;quot;. If an assignment does not meet these criteria, the assignment will not be applied to the resource group. Read more about the assignment review process [[Review assignment process|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Fetch PINs ====&lt;br /&gt;
For portals with VCF enabled there will be a button &#039;&#039;&#039;Fetch PINs&#039;&#039;&#039; that will connect with PIE to fetch any available PINs for the resources in the group. These PINs can then be applied to the VCF configurations of the group. Read more about VCF [[Vehicle Communication Forwarder|here]] and about applying the fetched PINs [[I/O configurations#Apply uploaded PINs|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Manipulating Resources in a Resource Group====&lt;br /&gt;
In the right hand table in Figure &amp;quot;Manipulating Resources in Resource Group&amp;quot;, you see a set of resources for a resource group. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Rg.png|left|thumb|800x800px|Manipulating Resources in Resource Group]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here are both WCUs and cars part of the group. In addition to the type there is a column named “Status”. That column only applies to WCUs. The use of this column is as follows. Assume you have a resource group consisting of 50 WCUs. Further, lets make a configuration change to that resource group. Depending on where the WCUs geographically are and how they are used the WCUs will be updated at different times. How do you you know when all WCUs are up to date in the resource group? You could check them individually in the “Vehicles” panel but that is not very elegant and time saving. Instead, just watch the “Status” column for the WCUs. When a WCU is up to date with respect to the group configuration the color in the column will be green. The value is updated each 30 seconds. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The different color values are: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Red ===== &lt;br /&gt;
The WCU&#039;s configuration was edited after the resource group&#039;s configuration was saved. The WCU will never use the resource group&#039;s configuration. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Yellow ===== &lt;br /&gt;
The WCU&#039;s configuration is the same as the resource group&#039;s but the WCU has not yet updated to this configuration. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Green ===== &lt;br /&gt;
The WCU has updated to the resource group&#039;s configuration. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can remove individual resources from a group by selecting the resource and then press the “Remove resource” button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yet another button remains and it is the button “Base Group on Resource”. When you add a WCU to a resource group in the “Vehicles” panel you have the option of not updating the WCU configuration to match the one of the resource group&#039;s, see Figure &amp;quot;Dialog: WCU Moved to Another Resource Group&amp;quot; in [[#Resource Groups]]. Using this function it is possible to base the whole group on a WCU&#039;s configuration rather than the group&#039;s configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== The Vehicle Profiles Tab ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This tab is further described [[Vehicle Pofiles|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== The Alarm Tab ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This tab is further described [[Alarm|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The User Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Illustration46.png|border|800x800px]]The basic layout of the areas is just the same here as before. At the top you have a search area, in the middle is a result are and at the bottom are a set of buttons. The tab with a set of example users is in the Figure &amp;quot;User Administration Tab&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
The nine columns are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;User ID&#039;&#039;&#039;. The unique ID that the user must enter when logging in.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Name&#039;&#039;&#039;. The name of the user.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Roles&#039;&#039;&#039;. Depending on which roles the user has to, he/she have different privileges. The roles are non-overlapping, i.e. being an “Admin” does not necessarily mean that you can do everything a “User” can do.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Enabled&#039;&#039;&#039;. Tells whether the account is enabled or not.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Email Address&#039;&#039;&#039;. By registering an email address a user can receive notifications via email from a WCU when certain event occurs.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Last login date&#039;&#039;&#039;. The date when the user last logged in.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Two factor auth&#039;&#039;&#039;. Whether the two-factor authentication is turned on for a particular user.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Logged in&#039;&#039;&#039;. You can see if the user is currently logged in.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Creation Date&#039;&#039;&#039;. The date of when the user was created. Only visible on users created after December 3 2020.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the bottom there are eight buttons. They are:&lt;br /&gt;
# The “New” button brings up the “New User” dialog which adds a new user to the portal&lt;br /&gt;
# The “Edit” button brings up the “Edit User” dialog&lt;br /&gt;
# The “Change Password” button brings up a dialog to change a user&#039;s password.&lt;br /&gt;
# The “Create new secret” button. Pressing this generates a new cryptographic salt to be used when generating one-time passwords. If you do this for a user without enabling the possibility to see the secret on the next login, renders the user unable to login to the portal. No dialog is opened, simply a message saying that a new one has been generated is shown.&lt;br /&gt;
# The “Show secret” button. Shows a dialog with the cryptographic salt shown in clear text as well as the QR-code, more on this later.&lt;br /&gt;
# Edit roles and permissions&lt;br /&gt;
# The “Save headers” button. Saves the headers and their order to be used as default on later logins.&lt;br /&gt;
# Video. Start a video conversations with another user of the portal. You must have the software “Confero” installed for this to work.&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.93 of the portal it is also possible for an admin user to impersonate another user. See [[New features in v2.93]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====The New User Dialog====&lt;br /&gt;
By pressing the “New User” button the dialog appears as presented in Figure &amp;quot;New User Dialog&amp;quot;. Mandatory fields are User ID and the two password fields. Remember that the User ID must be unique and you will be notified if it is not. Add the roles that you want the user to have by moving roles from the left list to the right. You can hover each role to view more information about them. Click the “Add” button to add the user or change you mind by clicking “Cancel”. If you click &amp;quot;Add&amp;quot; and the roles you have selected gives the user access to some wcus tasks, you will also be prompted about giving the user access to currently running tasks on these wcus as well. This can also be done when editing the roles of a user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the new user has been created, that user is granted a default minimalistic view in both the Tasks- and Vehicles-panel. This mechanism exists to prevent new users from being overwhelmed by the large amount of columns available in these panels. Instead, they are only presented with the most important columns, with the option to see more columns if they want to. The default columns for new users are:&lt;br /&gt;
* Tasks panel&lt;br /&gt;
** Task ID&lt;br /&gt;
** Assignment name&lt;br /&gt;
** Assignment type&lt;br /&gt;
** WCU ID&lt;br /&gt;
** Status&lt;br /&gt;
** Task creator&lt;br /&gt;
** Creation date&lt;br /&gt;
** Resource group&lt;br /&gt;
* Vehicles panel&lt;br /&gt;
** WCU ID&lt;br /&gt;
** VIN&lt;br /&gt;
** WCU comment&lt;br /&gt;
** WCU software version&lt;br /&gt;
** WCU connection time&lt;br /&gt;
** Resource group&lt;br /&gt;
** Active alarms&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:NewUserDialog252.png|left|thumb|New User Dialog]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PromptNewUserCurAss.png|left|thumb|Prompt to give user permission to currently running tasks on specified wcus]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====The Edit User Dialog====&lt;br /&gt;
You can at any time modify a user by pressing the “Modify” button to bring up the dialog in Figure &amp;quot;Modify User Dialog&amp;quot;. The User ID cannot be changed. A disabled account can not be used for logging onto the portal even if the correct user name and password are given. To modify the user roles, select or deselect a role by using the check boxes. To turn on two-factor authentication for a user, check the appropriate box. When you are satisfied with your modifications, press the “Save” button to make them permanent on the portal or press the “Cancel” button if you change your mind.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To enable two factor authentication, tick the check box “Enable two factor authentication”. This will force the user to add another special one time password in addition to the account password when logging into the portal. The one time password is generated by a program on either your computer or if you want to you can install it on your smart phone which is probably the best solution. The program that generates one time password is based on a cryptographic salt and the current time. The cryptographic salt is randomly generated by the portal and is individual for each user. A secret can at any time be regenerated for a user which will render the user unable to login if you do not tick the check box “Show the secret to the user on their next login”. Advice the user to install &amp;quot;Google Authenticator&amp;quot; on their phone before they login to the portal for the first time as the secret will only be shown once and must be installed in the authenticator app at that time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Just like when adding a new user, you can give or remove roles to the user by clicking &amp;quot;Edit user roles&amp;quot; and moving roles from the left list to the right and vice versa. If you edit the user roles to add some wcu task permission to the user, you will also here be prompted about giving the user access to currently running tasks on these wcus as well.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EditUser252.png|left|thumb|Modify User Dialog]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====The Change Password Dialog====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change a user&#039;s password, press the “Change Password” button and the dialog below will appear. It is pretty straightforward as you type in the new password in the “New password” entry and you need to confirm it by typing it again in the entry below it. If you are satisfied, click the “Change” button or the “Cancel” button if you decide not to change the password.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Illustration49.png|thumb|frame|left|Change Password Dialog]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====The Show Secret Window====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Illustration50.png|thumb|frame|QR-code Window]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A QR-code is shown that can be transferred to a smart phone by simply starting the authenticator app (we recommend using &amp;quot;Google Authenticator&amp;quot;), point it at the screen and let the phone read the QR-code. An example of such a QR-code can be seen in Figure &amp;quot;QR-code Window&amp;quot;. If the application that is to be used as a password generator do not support QR codes, the secret is shown in clear text at the top.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Edit User Roles and Permissions ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here it is also possible to edit user roles and permissions, read further instructions [[Roles and permissions|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== The Labels Tab ===&lt;br /&gt;
This tab is used to administer labels. Here you can enable/disable labels, rename labels which are not system labels and it is possible to make private labels global. If the feature is enabled at your site, it is also possible to configure label announcements here. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
More about these functions can be found in [[Labels#Administer labels|Administer Labels]]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The WCU Status Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.47 the WCU status tab has changed. See [[WCU Status]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;The Following applies to portal version 2.46 and older:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This view is supposed to be used for supervising a set of vehicles. The supervision is done in real time and the values for the set of vehicles are updated as soon as they arrive on the server from the different vehicles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The set of status information collected comprises three parts:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;General information:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Alive, a heart beat signal&lt;br /&gt;
* Connectivity, what data rates are currently available to the vehicle.&lt;br /&gt;
** 4G&lt;br /&gt;
** 3G&lt;br /&gt;
** 2G&lt;br /&gt;
** none&lt;br /&gt;
* Cell Signal Quality (CSQ). Indicates the signal strength of the mobile modem. The values are between 0 – 31, the higher the value the better. The special value of 99 is designated an unknown or not even detectable signal.&lt;br /&gt;
* GPS, simply a binary indicator of fix or no fix for the GPS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Data Storage Usage:&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This set of data informs how much collected data resides in the WCU for each type of data collector (module). Total data indicates how much of the total amount of data storage available is used. After that, each type of data collector is lined up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Data Collection Status:&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When modules collect data they go through a set of states when triggers starts, stops and other events occur. Currently, only such events for the signal reader module is available. An optional message accompanying the current state is shown in parenthesis.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen is divided in two parts, on the left hand side is a table with search functionality for finding the vehicles of interest and on the right hand side is the monitored vehicles. To monitor a vehicles you search for it in the table and then drag and drop the vehicle on the right hand panel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A view of the panel is depicted in the Figure &amp;quot;WCU Status Tab&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Illustration57.png|left|frame|WCU Status Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The Key Figures Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this tab it is possible to view charts over recorded statistics for the portal. More about this option is found under [[Key Figures]].&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Henrik.Moller</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=Shelve_and_Unshelve_a_WCU&amp;diff=4064</id>
		<title>Shelve and Unshelve a WCU</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=Shelve_and_Unshelve_a_WCU&amp;diff=4064"/>
		<updated>2025-11-05T08:36:35Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Henrik.Moller: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;includeonly&amp;gt;=== Shelve and Unshelve a WCU ===&amp;lt;/includeonly&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When a WCU is shelved it is disconnected from its car, if connected, and removed from its resource group, if any. In addition all active measure tasks are set to stopped pending and the system label &#039;&#039;shelving_in_progress&#039;&#039; is attached. This label will remain until all tasks for the WCU have status &#039;&#039;Stopped&#039;&#039; and all gathered measure data is uploaded to the portal after of which the label is replaced by the system label &#039;&#039;shelving_done&#039;&#039;. In this final stage it is also possible to &#039;&#039;&#039;unshelve&#039;&#039;&#039; the WCU using the corresponding button and thus removing the &#039;&#039;shelving_done&#039;&#039;-label. Note that when a WCU either has &#039;&#039;&#039;shelving in progress&#039;&#039;&#039; or is &#039;&#039;&#039;shelved&#039;&#039;&#039; it is no longer possible to add new measure tasks. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ShelvingUnshelving.png|thumb|Unshelve/Shelve button]]&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to &#039;&#039;&#039;Unshelve&#039;&#039;&#039; one or multiple WCUs using the &#039;&#039;&#039;Unshelve&#039;&#039;&#039; button in the Vehicles-tab. If the choices does not apply to the set of selected resources the button is disabled. It is possible to &#039;&#039;&#039;unshelve&#039;&#039;&#039; a WCU from any of the existing shelving states; &#039;&#039;&#039;shelved, shelving refurbish in progress&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;refurbished&#039;&#039;&#039;. Note that the user must have the permission &#039;&#039;&#039;wcu:shelving:write&#039;&#039;&#039; to be able to perform this operation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As of version 2.96.0, it is possible to initiate shelving on one or multiple WCUs using the &#039;&#039;&#039;Shelve&#039;&#039;&#039; button. The button is disabled if no row is selected or if the selected WCU is not in the &#039;&#039;In Operation&#039;&#039; state. Once the shelving process begins, both the &#039;&#039;&#039;Shelve&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Unshelve&#039;&#039;&#039; buttons will be disabled until the process is complete. Note that users must have the &#039;&#039;&#039;wcu:shelving:write&#039;&#039;&#039; permission to perform this operation.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Henrik.Moller</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=Shelve_and_Unshelve_a_WCU&amp;diff=4063</id>
		<title>Shelve and Unshelve a WCU</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=Shelve_and_Unshelve_a_WCU&amp;diff=4063"/>
		<updated>2025-11-05T08:36:18Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Henrik.Moller: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;includeonly&amp;gt;=== Shelve and Unshelve a WCU ===&amp;lt;/includeonly&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When a WCU is shelved it is disconnected from its car, if connected, and removed from its resource group, if any. In addition all active measure tasks are set to stopped pending and the system label &#039;&#039;shelving_in_progress&#039;&#039; is attached. This label will remain until all tasks for the WCU have status &#039;&#039;Stopped&#039;&#039; and all gathered measure data is uploaded to the portal after of which the label is replaced by the system label &#039;&#039;shelving_done&#039;&#039;. In this final stage it is also possible to &#039;&#039;&#039;unshelve&#039;&#039;&#039; the WCU using the corresponding button and thus removing the &#039;&#039;shelving_done&#039;&#039;-label. Note that when a WCU either has &#039;&#039;&#039;shelving in progress&#039;&#039;&#039; or is &#039;&#039;&#039;shelved&#039;&#039;&#039; it is no longer possible to add new measure tasks. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ShelvingUnshelving.png|thumb|Unshelve/Shelve button]]&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to &#039;&#039;&#039;Unshelve&#039;&#039;&#039; one or multiple WCUs using the &#039;&#039;&#039;Unshelve&#039;&#039;&#039; button in the Vehicles-tab. If the choices does not apply to the set of selected resources the button is disabled. It is possible to &#039;&#039;&#039;unshelve&#039;&#039;&#039; a WCU from any of the existing shelving states; &#039;&#039;&#039;shelved, shelving refurbish in progress&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;refurbished&#039;&#039;&#039;. Note that the user must have the permission &#039;&#039;&#039;wcu:shelving:write&#039;&#039;&#039; to be able to perform this operation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As of version 2.96.0, it is possible to initiate shelving one or multiple WCUs using the &#039;&#039;&#039;Shelve&#039;&#039;&#039; button. The button is disabled if no row is selected or if the selected WCU is not in the &#039;&#039;In Operation&#039;&#039; state. Once the shelving process begins, both the &#039;&#039;&#039;Shelve&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Unshelve&#039;&#039;&#039; buttons will be disabled until the process is complete. Note that users must have the &#039;&#039;&#039;wcu:shelving:write&#039;&#039;&#039; permission to perform this operation.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Henrik.Moller</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.96&amp;diff=4062</id>
		<title>New features in v2.96</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.96&amp;diff=4062"/>
		<updated>2025-11-05T08:32:20Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Henrik.Moller: /* Users can now shelve a WCU directly from the Vehicles panel. */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This page gives a brief introduction to new features or changes introduced in version 2.96 of the WICE portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== DLT Daemon mode and DLT UDS in parallel ==&lt;br /&gt;
The portal now supports creating DLT tasks with daemon mode and UDS service 38 enabled at the same time. This requires WCU software version 2.96.0 or later for the selected WCUs. See [[Creating a Task#Diagnostic Log and Trace (DLT)|Creating a Task#Diagnostic Log and Trace (DLT).]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== DLT Daemon address via vehicle announcement ==&lt;br /&gt;
For WCUs configured for software version 2.96.0 it is possible to get the daemon address via vehicle announcement instead of specifying a daemon address when the task is created. See [[Creating a Task#Diagnostic Log and Trace (DLT)|Creating a Task#Diagnostic Log and Trace (DLT).]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Set, View, and Apply Default WCU Configurations ==&lt;br /&gt;
Starting from version 2.96, users can now set, view, and apply default WCU configurations. Admin permissions are required to access these new functions. Read more about it [[Default WCU Configuration|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Users can now shelve a WCU directly from the Vehicles panel. ==&lt;br /&gt;
Users with WCU shelving permissions can now shelve a WCU directly in the Vehicles panel. Read more about it [[Shelve and Unshelve a WCU|here]].&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Henrik.Moller</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=Shelve_and_Unshelve_a_WCU&amp;diff=4061</id>
		<title>Shelve and Unshelve a WCU</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=Shelve_and_Unshelve_a_WCU&amp;diff=4061"/>
		<updated>2025-11-05T08:31:43Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Henrik.Moller: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;includeonly&amp;gt;=== Shelve and Unshelve a WCU ===&amp;lt;/includeonly&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When a WCU is shelved it is disconnected from its car, if connected, and removed from its resource group, if any. In addition all active measure tasks are set to stopped pending and the system label &#039;&#039;shelving_in_progress&#039;&#039; is attached. This label will remain until all tasks for the WCU have status &#039;&#039;Stopped&#039;&#039; and all gathered measure data is uploaded to the portal after of which the label is replaced by the system label &#039;&#039;shelving_done&#039;&#039;. In this final stage it is also possible to &#039;&#039;&#039;unshelve&#039;&#039;&#039; the WCU using the corresponding button and thus removing the &#039;&#039;shelving_done&#039;&#039;-label. Note that when a WCU either has &#039;&#039;&#039;shelving in progress&#039;&#039;&#039; or is &#039;&#039;&#039;shelved&#039;&#039;&#039; it is no longer possible to add new measure tasks. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ShelvingUnshelving.png|thumb|Unshelve/Shelve button]]&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to &#039;&#039;&#039;Unshelve&#039;&#039;&#039; one or multiple WCUs using the &#039;&#039;&#039;Unshelve&#039;&#039;&#039; button in the Vehicles-tab. If the choices does not apply to the set of selected resources the button is disabled. It is possible to &#039;&#039;&#039;unshelve&#039;&#039;&#039; a WCU from any of the existing shelving states; &#039;&#039;&#039;shelved, shelving refurbish in progress&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;refurbished&#039;&#039;&#039;. Note that the user must have the permission &#039;&#039;&#039;wcu:shelving:write&#039;&#039;&#039; to be able to perform this operation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As of version 2.96.0, it is possible to shelve one or multiple WCUs using the &#039;&#039;&#039;Shelve&#039;&#039;&#039; button. The button is disabled if no row is selected or if the selected WCU is not in the &#039;&#039;In Operation&#039;&#039; state. Once the shelving process begins, both the &#039;&#039;&#039;Shelve&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Unshelve&#039;&#039;&#039; buttons will be disabled until the process is complete. Note that users must have the &#039;&#039;&#039;wcu:shelving:write&#039;&#039;&#039; permission to perform this operation.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Henrik.Moller</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=Shelve_and_Unshelve_a_WCU&amp;diff=4060</id>
		<title>Shelve and Unshelve a WCU</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=Shelve_and_Unshelve_a_WCU&amp;diff=4060"/>
		<updated>2025-11-05T08:25:31Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Henrik.Moller: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;includeonly&amp;gt;=== Shelve and Unshelve a WCU ===&amp;lt;/includeonly&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When a WCU is shelved it is disconnected from its car, if connected, and removed from its resource group, if any. In addition all active measure tasks are set to stopped pending and the system label &#039;&#039;shelving_in_progress&#039;&#039; is attached. This label will remain until all tasks for the WCU have status &#039;&#039;Stopped&#039;&#039; and all gathered measure data is uploaded to the portal after of which the label is replaced by the system label &#039;&#039;shelving_done&#039;&#039;. In this final stage it is also possible to unshelve the WCU using the corresponding button and thus removing the &#039;&#039;shelving_done&#039;&#039;-label. Note that when a WCU either has shelving in progress or is shelved it is no longer possible to add new measure tasks. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ShelvingUnshelving.png|thumb|Unshelve/Shelve button]]&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to &amp;quot;Unshelve&amp;quot; one or multiple WCUs using the &amp;quot;Unshelve&amp;quot;-button in the Vehicles-tab. If the choices does not apply to the set of selected resources the button is disabled. It is possible to unshelve a WCU from any of the existing shelving states; shelving in progress, shelved, shelving refurbish in progress or refurbished. Note that the user must have the permission &#039;&#039;&#039;wcu:shelving:write&#039;&#039;&#039; to be able to perform this operation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As of version 2.96.0, it is possible to shelve one or multiple WCUs using the &#039;&#039;&#039;Shelve&#039;&#039;&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The button is disabled if no row is selected or if the selected WCU is not in the &#039;&#039;In Operation&#039;&#039; state. Note that users must have the &#039;&#039;&#039;wcu:shelving:write&#039;&#039;&#039; permission to perform this operation.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Henrik.Moller</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=File:ShelvingUnshelving.png&amp;diff=4059</id>
		<title>File:ShelvingUnshelving.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=File:ShelvingUnshelving.png&amp;diff=4059"/>
		<updated>2025-11-05T08:13:27Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Henrik.Moller: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;ShelvingUnshelving&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Henrik.Moller</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=Vehicles&amp;diff=4058</id>
		<title>Vehicles</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=Vehicles&amp;diff=4058"/>
		<updated>2025-11-05T07:44:01Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Henrik.Moller: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;includeonly&amp;gt;=Vehicles Tab=&amp;lt;/includeonly&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This view is used to handle the various vehicles that are assigned to you. A figure of this view&lt;br /&gt;
is presented below in the Figure &amp;quot;Vehicles Tab&amp;quot;. At the top, the red section, is a search area where you&lt;br /&gt;
type in the criteria to be used for fetching the vehicles you are interested in. As you enter your&lt;br /&gt;
criteria a row count is presented in the upper right area to show how many potential matches&lt;br /&gt;
there are. The entries are also fetched as you type but only as many rows as fit your current&lt;br /&gt;
view are fetched. As you scroll down more results will be fetched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Illustration26.png|none|thumb|700x700px|Vehicles Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The number of possible columns to show is quite large. You can select which columns you wish to see by right clicking on the column header and select &amp;quot;Columns..&amp;quot;. A small window will pop-up, in which you can select which columns should be visible in the table. These are the available columns:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Active alarms&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|Presents a numeric summary of alarms. It displays the amount of errors and warnings.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot; | &amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Connected&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Connected&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| Shows how many minutes have passed since the WCU made a connection to the WICE portal.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot; | &amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Distance&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Distance&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| Shows the distance the car has been driven the last week. (SoH task specific)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot; | &amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Last_DRO&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Last DRO&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| Says when the DRO log file was last transferred to the portal.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot; | &amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Last_log&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Last log&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| Shows when the last log file was transferred to the portal.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot; | &amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Mileage&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Mileage&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| The column shows the mileage of the car.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot; | &amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Plate_number&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Plate number&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| The plate number of the car where the WCU is mounted.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Platform type&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|Search WCU by platform type.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot; | &amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Project_Id&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Project Id&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| Shows the project identification number.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot; | &amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Proto_number&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Proto number&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| Shows the proto number.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Resource group&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|The resource group (if any) the WCU is part of.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot; | &amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Series&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Series&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| Shows the series attribute.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot; | &amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;TSU&amp;quot;&amp;gt;TSU&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| Shows the TSU identifier.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot; | &amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Upload&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Upload&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| This column says how much data has been transferred from the WCU to the portal the last week.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot; | &amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Upload_date&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Upload date&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| Contains which date the last upload was done&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot; | &amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Upload_size&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Upload size&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| Says what the size, in kilobytes, of the last data upload was.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot; | &amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Up-time&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Uptime&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| Shows how many hours the WCU been running the last week.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot; | &amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;VIN&amp;quot;&amp;gt;VIN&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| Shows the Vehicle Identification Number of the car where the WCU is mounted.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot; | &amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Voltage&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Voltage &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| The column shows the latest known battery voltage as reported by the CEM.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot; | &amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;WCU_ID&amp;quot;&amp;gt;WCU ID&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| The MAC ID of the WCU. For example: AA-01-AA-01-AA-01.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot; | &amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;WCU_Description&amp;quot;&amp;gt;WCU Description&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| A textual comment attached to the WCU.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;WCU Firmware&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|Shows which firmware the WCU uses.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot; | &amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;WCU_voltage&amp;quot;&amp;gt;WCU voltage&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| Shows the voltage as measured by the WCU.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot; | &amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;WCU_Version&amp;quot;&amp;gt;WCU Version&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| Shows which version the current WCU software has.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot; | &amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;WCU_storage_usage&amp;quot;&amp;gt;WCU storage usage&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| Shows the amount of storage available to store data on the WCU.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;WCU name&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|Shows the name of the WCU.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;WCU state&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|Shows the current state of the WCU.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, as there are so many columns present you have the option of selecting which ones you would like to see by right-clicking on the table header. If you would like your selection to be remembered between sessions, use the binocular icon with an add sign in bottom right corner in the Figure &amp;quot;Vehicles Tab&amp;quot;. To save the currently entered search expression, similarly use the magnifying glass icon with an add sign. To read more about the view and search functionality, click [[Save View and Search Expressions|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a concept called “resource groups” you should be aware of in this panel. A resource group is simply a way to refer to a group of resources (WCU, Car) collectively. An example is when creating tasks you can select a resource group instead of the individual WCU:s to start a new task. Also, when showing the positions on a map, you select a resource group and press “Show position”, all WCU:s in that resource group will show. To see which resources are in a resource group you press the triangle to the left of the row and the row&lt;br /&gt;
opens up to show the individual members. To show the members in the view you can rightclick the entry and select the option “find members” from the menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When selecting a row in the table the selected row changes to a blue shade. You can modify&lt;br /&gt;
the description of the WCU by clicking in the “Edit Description” button and entering a new description. You can search among the vehicles log files by clicking the “Get log files” button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Right click context menu ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you select one or more rows in the table, you can right click on the selected rows. This will display a context menu with several options, some of which are described here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Go to Tasks Panel &#039;&#039;&#039;  &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
This allows you to instantly jump to the tasks panel, which will automatically perform a search based on either the WCU or the car which the selected row represents.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Go to Search Panel &#039;&#039;&#039;  &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This allows you to instantly jump to the search panel. The search panel will automatically perform a search based on either the WCU or the car.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Go to Timeline &#039;&#039;&#039;  &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This allows you to jump to the Timeline-view, which will adjust itself to the WCU you have selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Go to alarms &#039;&#039;&#039;  &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting this will take you to the alarms panel, where a search is conducted for all selected WCUs. This allows you to quickly see all alarms for a specific set of WCU resources. This works well together with the Active Alarms column (which you can read about further up this page), which tells you if a WCU has any active alarms. If a WCU has any active alarms, then using &amp;quot;go to alarms&amp;quot; will allow you to review those alarms in detail.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Upload vehicle pins&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting this will open a window where you may select a file to upload vehicle PINs. The expected structure of the file is one line per PIN where each line is of the format &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ECU-ID (hexadecimal)&amp;gt;;&amp;lt;ECU name&amp;gt;;&amp;lt;Service Area (hexadecimal)&amp;gt;;&amp;lt;PIN&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1D0D;HIA;0x5;AA:BB:CC:DD:EE&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will upload the pin AA:BB:CC:DD:EE for an ECU 0x1D0D (i.e. HIA) with service area 0x5. This PIN will then be associated to the vehicle connected to the WCU.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Compare WCU configurations&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting this on a single WCU will open a dialog where you may choose other WCUs to compare against the selected WCU. Once compared, the result panel that is opened will show each WCUs configuration variables that differ from the selected WCUs configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Remove WCU(s) from Resource Group &#039;&#039;&#039;  &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If WCUs which are included in a resource group are selected, the menu option &amp;quot;Remove WCU(s) from Resource Group&amp;quot; will appear. They do not have to be in the same resource group as each other. If a resource which do not fulfill this requirement is selected in addition, this option will not be visible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Show WCU history&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ShowWCUHistoryUpdatedAgain.png|alt=|thumb|Example of a Show WCU history]]&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting this shows a window with the history of the selected WCU. The following columns will be displayed in the window:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Change date - Displays the date the WCU was changed.&lt;br /&gt;
*Type of change- Displays the type of update that occurred.&lt;br /&gt;
* Description - Displays a description of the WCU.&lt;br /&gt;
* Active - Shows if the WCU is active or not.&lt;br /&gt;
* WCU ID  - Shows the WCU ID.&lt;br /&gt;
* WCU name - Displays the WCU name.&lt;br /&gt;
* WCU version - The WCU version.&lt;br /&gt;
* WCU firmware version - The WCU firmware version.&lt;br /&gt;
* Changed by - The user who modified the WCU.&lt;br /&gt;
* Resource group - The resource group.&lt;br /&gt;
* ICCID - The SIM card installed.&lt;br /&gt;
*State - reflects the WCU’s status at the time of the change. Possible states include: &#039;&#039;In Operation&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;Shelving in Progress&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;Shelved&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;Shelving Refurbish in Progress&#039;&#039;, and &#039;&#039;Shelving Refurbish Done.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Modem ID - Shows the Modem ID. (This is hidden by default but can be revealed by right-clicking a column and selecting the &amp;quot;Columns&amp;quot; drop down menu.). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the Show WCU history option to be available only a single WCU can be selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting from version &#039;&#039;&#039;2.95.0&#039;&#039;&#039;, you can now search for transitions within the State column. The available transitions are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* In operation -&amp;gt; Shelving in progress.&lt;br /&gt;
* Shelving in progress -&amp;gt; Shelved.&lt;br /&gt;
* Shelved -&amp;gt; In operation.&lt;br /&gt;
* Refurbish -&amp;gt; In operation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When selected, it retrieves all instances where the WCU state transition occurred. For example, from &#039;&#039;In Operation&#039;&#039; to &#039;&#039;Shelving in Progress&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Apply default configuration&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting this opens the Default Configurations panel, where the user can choose a default configuration to apply to the selected WCU(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Trigger upload now&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Momentarily stop the WCU, offload it and upload any data as soon as possible. This trigger button is only visible if the WCU state is in-operation and the WCU version is later then 2.39&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Trigger reboot now&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reboots the trigger and WCU. This trigger button is only visible if the WCU state is in-operation and the WCU version is later then 2.39&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Trigger collect and upload&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This action will cause the task to momentarily stop and upload any data as soon as possible. This trigger button is only visible if the WCU state is in-operation and the WCU version is later then 2.45.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Trigger VIN readout&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Trigger VIN readout, this action will cause the task to momentarily stop .This trigger button is only visible if the WCU state is in-operation and the WCU version is later then 2.65.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==New task==&lt;br /&gt;
To create a new task for all selected WCUs, click the button [[New task|New Task]]. To learn more about creating each specific task see [[Creating a Task]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Upload Vehicle pins ==&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting this will open a window where you may select a file to upload vehicle PINs. The expected structure of the file is one line per PIN where each line is of the format &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;VIN&amp;gt;;&amp;lt;ECU-ID (hexadecimal)&amp;gt;;&amp;lt;ECU name&amp;gt;;&amp;lt;Service Area (hexadecimal)&amp;gt;;&amp;lt;PIN&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;WICE_VIN_1;1D0D;HIA;0x5;AA:BB:CC:DD:EE&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will save the pin AA:BB:CC:DD:EE for the ECU 0x1D0D (i.e. HIA) with service area 0x5 and will be associated with the vehicle WICE_VIN_1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Show the Vehicle Position==&lt;br /&gt;
To see the last reported position of a vehicle, click the “Show Position” button which opens up a map view of where the vehicle was last known to be. You can view several vehicles simultaneously by ctrl- or shift-clicking the vehicles you are interested in. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to know more about the &amp;quot;Show position&amp;quot;-tool [[Show position|you can read more about it here]]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==View Diagnostic Trouble Codes==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Illustration28.png|thumb|300px|Viewing Diagnostic Trouble Codes]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If an SoH task has been enabled to do Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) read-outs, you can view the trouble codes by selecting the vehicle you are interested in and push the button “View DTCs”. In Figure &amp;quot;Viewing Diagnostic Trouble Codes&amp;quot; you can see an example presentation of DTCs. There are five columns in the table. The leftmost is the name of the ECU issuing the DTC, next is the date and time when the trouble code was read-out, the actual DTC with clear text description, and thereafter the VIN and WCU id of the vehicle. &lt;br /&gt;
If you click in the column for the actual trouble code, a dialog opens with that particular trouble codes. You can extend the size of the dialog in order to examine the trouble codes in more detail.&lt;br /&gt;
You can also search the trouble codes as you can see at the top of Figure &amp;quot;Viewing Diagnostic Trouble Codes&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==View ECU software==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Illustration29.png|thumb|300px|ECU Software Versions]]&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to see the ECU software number for each ECU in a vehicle.&lt;br /&gt;
Press the button “ECU SW” after you have selected one vehicle. The following view will be&lt;br /&gt;
shown. As you can see in Figure &amp;quot;ECU Software Versions&amp;quot;, each ECU&#039;s software number is shown along with&lt;br /&gt;
when it was read. You can download the list as a tab-separated text file if you press “Download”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Get WCU Up-time==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wcu_uptime.png|frame|WCU Up-time Dialog]]&lt;br /&gt;
This function is used to get a compilation of the up-time of a set of vehicles during a particular time span. Select the WCUs you are interested in and the click the “Get WCU uptime” button. This brings up the dialog to the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose the dates you are interested by choosing a start and end date. Next you have the option of downloading a CSV file, or excel file. The up-time in that file is listed as hours up-time per day per WCU.&lt;br /&gt;
The other option is to compile the up-time in a chart shown on screen. The up-time is averaged over the WCUs selected for each day. WCUs having no up-time at all are excluded from the compilation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.42 there is a new feature to display the WCUs uptime based on the data sent from statusd. More info in [[WCU Uptime]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Export SoH Data==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Soh data export.png|frame|SoH Data Export Panel]]&lt;br /&gt;
You can export data from SoH tasks to your local computer by using the function&lt;br /&gt;
“Export SoH data”. Select the cars you are interested in as you can export for more than&lt;br /&gt;
one car in one export.&lt;br /&gt;
You select the dates you are interested in getting the data from. Check each item you are interested in. Currently you can select mileage, WCU voltage, ECU software versions, battery voltage, storage usage and diagnostic trouble codes. &lt;br /&gt;
The file can be exported in CSV format (suitable for Excel and other spreadsheet applications) and in XML format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Resource Groups==&lt;br /&gt;
WCUs and cars can collectively be referred to as &amp;quot;resources&amp;quot;. As such they can be grouped&lt;br /&gt;
together and be handled collectively in order to ease the administration of a set of similar individuals. A resource group can consist of both cars and WCUs but usually only&lt;br /&gt;
one type of resource is in a resource group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You identify a resource group by a gray arrow like icon to the left in the table row. If you&lt;br /&gt;
click the icon the entry opens up and makes room for showing which resources are part&lt;br /&gt;
of the resource group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.42 viewing the resource group&#039;s resources has been improved. More info can be found in [[Resource group&#039;s resources]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a new task is created any resource groups assigned to you will show up in addition to individual WCUs. There is, however, no indication as to the particular entry is a&lt;br /&gt;
resource group or not. If you select a resource group, the new task will be downloaded to all the WCUs that are part of the resource group.&lt;br /&gt;
As a regular user you can not create and remove resource groups, only an administrator&lt;br /&gt;
of the portal can do this.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.42 of the portal it is easier to search out members of resource groups using the &amp;quot;Resource group&amp;quot; column. When searching in this column one will get results that either matches the name of a resource group WCU or WCUs that are part of a resource group that matches the search criteria. In other words, if we search for &amp;quot;ABCD&amp;quot; we will get the resource group &amp;quot;ABCD&amp;quot; together with all WCUs that are part of the &amp;quot;ABCD&amp;quot; group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This column can also be used to list all WCUs that are not part of any resource group. To perform this search, put &amp;quot;^$&amp;quot; in the &amp;quot;Resource group&amp;quot; column.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively, you can find the resource group that a WCU belongs to, by right-clicking the WCU and select &amp;quot;Search resource group&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Modules==&lt;br /&gt;
If you have the right permission you will be able to view a WCU:s modules, and&lt;br /&gt;
configure them. A module is a specific functionality of the WCU, such as a measurement tool. The available modules are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Portal Administrator View#configure the area5 module|Area5]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Portal Administrator View#Configure the audio module|Audio]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Portal Administrator View#Configure the Blue piraT Module|Blue piraT]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Portal Administrator View#Configure the Canrecorder Module|Canrecorder]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[DLT Module|DLT]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Portal Administrator View#Configure the DoIP Module|DoIP]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Portal Administrator View#Configure the ETAS Module|ETAS]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Portal Administrator View#Configure the File fetcher module|File Fetcher]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Portal Administrator View#Configure the GPS Module|GPS]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Portal Administrator View#Configure the IDC Module|IDC]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Portal Administrator View#Configure the IPEmotion RT Module|IPEmotion RT]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Portal Administrator View#Configure the LPD Module|LPD]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Portal Administrator View#Configure the MCD-Hub Module|MCD-Hub]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Portal Administrator View#Configure the M-log Module|M-log]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Portal Administrator View#Configure the MQTT Module|MQTT]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Portal Administrator View#Configure the RP Module|Rapid Prototyping (RP)]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Portal Administrator View#Configure the Signal Reader Module|Signal Reader]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Portal Administrator View#Configure the SmartEye Module|Smart Eye]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Portal Administrator View#Configure the Soft-Hub|SoftHub]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Portal Administrator View#Configure the Software Download Module|Software Download (SWDL)]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Portal Administrator View#Configure the State of Health Module|State of Health (SoH)]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Portal Administrator View#Configure the Uptime Module|Uptime]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Portal Administrator View#Configure the Vinreader Module|Vinreader]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Portal Administrator View#Configure the Video Module|Video]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Henrik.Moller</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.96&amp;diff=4057</id>
		<title>New features in v2.96</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.96&amp;diff=4057"/>
		<updated>2025-11-05T07:23:42Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Henrik.Moller: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This page gives a brief introduction to new features or changes introduced in version 2.96 of the WICE portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== DLT Daemon mode and DLT UDS in parallel ==&lt;br /&gt;
The portal now supports creating DLT tasks with daemon mode and UDS service 38 enabled at the same time. This requires WCU software version 2.96.0 or later for the selected WCUs. See [[Creating a Task#Diagnostic Log and Trace (DLT)|Creating a Task#Diagnostic Log and Trace (DLT).]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== DLT Daemon address via vehicle announcement ==&lt;br /&gt;
For WCUs configured for software version 2.96.0 it is possible to get the daemon address via vehicle announcement instead of specifying a daemon address when the task is created. See [[Creating a Task#Diagnostic Log and Trace (DLT)|Creating a Task#Diagnostic Log and Trace (DLT).]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Set, View, and Apply Default WCU Configurations ==&lt;br /&gt;
Starting from version 2.96, users can now set, view, and apply default WCU configurations. Admin permissions are required to access these new functions. Read more about it [[Default WCU Configuration|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Users can now shelve a WCU directly from the Vehicles panel. ==&lt;br /&gt;
Users with WCU shelving permissions can now shelve a WCU directly in the Vehicles panel. Read more about it here.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Henrik.Moller</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.96&amp;diff=4056</id>
		<title>New features in v2.96</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.96&amp;diff=4056"/>
		<updated>2025-11-05T07:05:20Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Henrik.Moller: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This page gives a brief introduction to new features or changes introduced in version 2.96 of the WICE portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== DLT Daemon mode and DLT UDS in parallel ==&lt;br /&gt;
The portal now supports creating DLT tasks with daemon mode and UDS service 38 enabled at the same time. This requires WCU software version 2.96.0 or later for the selected WCUs. See [[Creating a Task#Diagnostic Log and Trace (DLT)|Creating a Task#Diagnostic Log and Trace (DLT).]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== DLT Daemon address via vehicle announcement ==&lt;br /&gt;
For WCUs configured for software version 2.96.0 it is possible to get the daemon address via vehicle announcement instead of specifying a daemon address when the task is created. See [[Creating a Task#Diagnostic Log and Trace (DLT)|Creating a Task#Diagnostic Log and Trace (DLT).]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Set, View, and Apply Default WCU Configurations ==&lt;br /&gt;
Starting from version 2.96, users can now set, view, and apply default WCU configurations. Admin permissions are required to access these new functions. Read more about it [[Default WCU Configuration|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Users can now shelve a WCU directly from the Vehicles panel. ==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Henrik.Moller</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.96&amp;diff=4055</id>
		<title>New features in v2.96</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.96&amp;diff=4055"/>
		<updated>2025-11-05T07:00:44Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Henrik.Moller: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This page gives a brief introduction to new features or changes introduced in version 2.96 of the WICE portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== DLT Daemon mode and DLT UDS in parallel ==&lt;br /&gt;
The portal now supports creating DLT tasks with daemon mode and UDS service 38 enabled at the same time. This requires WCU software version 2.96.0 or later for the selected WCUs. See [[Creating a Task#Diagnostic Log and Trace (DLT)|Creating a Task#Diagnostic Log and Trace (DLT).]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== DLT Daemon address via vehicle announcement ==&lt;br /&gt;
For WCUs configured for software version 2.96.0 it is possible to get the daemon address via vehicle announcement instead of specifying a daemon address when the task is created. See [[Creating a Task#Diagnostic Log and Trace (DLT)|Creating a Task#Diagnostic Log and Trace (DLT).]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Set, View, and Apply Default WCU Configurations ==&lt;br /&gt;
Starting from version 2.96, users can now set, view, and apply default WCU configurations. Admin permissions are required to access these new functions. Read more about it [[Default WCU Configuration|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Introduced functionality to shelve a WCU from the Vehicles panel. ==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Henrik.Moller</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=Default_WCU_Configuration&amp;diff=4054</id>
		<title>Default WCU Configuration</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice297/index.php?title=Default_WCU_Configuration&amp;diff=4054"/>
		<updated>2025-11-04T09:52:01Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Henrik.Moller: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Starting with version 2.96.0, users with administrator permissions can &#039;&#039;&#039;set&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;view&#039;&#039;&#039;, and &#039;&#039;&#039;apply&#039;&#039;&#039; a default WCU configuration to any WCU. A default configuration includes both the WCU settings and the module configurations. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Set Default WCU Configuration ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SetandApplyDefaultConfig.png|thumb|Set/Apply default WCU configuration button]]&lt;br /&gt;
To access the &#039;&#039;&#039;Set&#039;&#039;&#039; function, an administrator must open the &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit Configuration&#039;&#039;&#039; in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Vehicle&#039;&#039;&#039; panel. In this view, a new button labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Set as Default Configuration&#039;&#039;&#039; is available. When clicked, it creates a new default configuration based on that WCU’s platform and version.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The version used for the default configuration is determined by the &#039;&#039;&#039;Preferred WCU Software&#039;&#039;&#039; column in the &#039;&#039;&#039;WCU&#039;&#039;&#039; tab within the Edit Configuration. If this column is set to &#039;&#039;&#039;NO_CHANGE&#039;&#039;&#039;, the system will instead use the value from the &#039;&#039;&#039;WCU Software Version&#039;&#039;&#039; column in the same tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Apply Default WCU Configuration ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Defaultconfigurationspanel.png|thumb|Apply Default Configurations Panel]]&lt;br /&gt;
To access the &#039;&#039;&#039;Apply&#039;&#039;&#039; function, an administrator must open &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit Configuration&#039;&#039;&#039; in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Vehicle&#039;&#039;&#039; panel. When clicked, a new panel called &#039;&#039;&#039;Default Configurations&#039;&#039;&#039; will open (see image &#039;&#039;“Default Configurations Panel”&#039;&#039; for reference).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This panel displays all default configuration versions available for the WCU’s platform type. To apply a default configuration, simply click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Apply Default Configuration&#039;&#039;&#039; button, and the selected configuration will be applied.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is also a shortcut to apply a default configuration to a WCU. By right-clicking on a WCU, a new option called &#039;&#039;&#039;Apply Default Configuration&#039;&#039;&#039; will be shown. Selecting this option will take the user directly to the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default Configurations&#039;&#039;&#039; panel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Apply Default Configuration&#039;&#039;&#039; function also supports applying a configuration to multiple WCUs simultaneously.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== View Default WCU Configuration ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ViewDefaultConfigurations.png|thumb|View Default Configurations Panel]]&lt;br /&gt;
In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Vehicle&#039;&#039;&#039; panel, administrator users will now see a new button labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;View Default Configurations&#039;&#039;&#039;. Clicking it opens the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default Configurations&#039;&#039;&#039; panel, providing an overview of all existing default configurations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this panel, users can view the WCU configuration by clicking the &#039;&#039;&#039;“View WCU Configuration”&#039;&#039;&#039; button, and the module configuration by clicking the &#039;&#039;&#039;“View Modules Configuration”&#039;&#039;&#039; button. Configurations viewed from this panel cannot be edited. Users can also remove a default configuration directly from this panel.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Henrik.Moller</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>